TB03300002E Tab 30

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage 30.
0-1
January 2018
Sheet 30 001
Motor Starters and

Contactors—Low Voltage
Contents 22
Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage
Manual Motor Control 23
MS Starter with Hand/Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1
MS Manual Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2
24
Type B100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-3
XT Manual Motor Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-4
Lighting Contactors 25
Non-Combination Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1
Electrically Held Non-Combination—CN35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2 26
Mechanically Held Non-Combination—C30CNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5
Magnetically Latched—202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-11
Enclosed Combination Type—ECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-13
27
NEMA Motor Starters—Electromechanical
NEMA Motor Starters Freedom Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 28
C440 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-11
C441 Motor Insight Motor Protection Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-13 29
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-15
XT IEC Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-20
EMS Electronic Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-34
30
Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 31
Autotransformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2
Part Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-3 32
Wye-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-4
Reduced Voltage—Solid-State
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1
33
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-6
S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-10 34
S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-18
DS6 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26 35
DS7 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-35
PSG Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-44
Enclosures 36
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1
Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-3 37
Group Control—Multi-Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1
Specifications:
38
See Eaton’s Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Sections 16481, Sections 26 29 13.11, 39
16484, 26 29 13.13,
16485, 26 29 13.15,
16902 26 29 05 40
41
42
43
Enclosed S801 Soft Start and Freedom NEMA
Starter with C440 Electronic Overload Relay
CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.0-2 Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage
January 2018
Sheet 30 002
This page intentionally left blank.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage 30.1-1
January 2018 Manual Motor Control
Sheet 30 003
Type MS
MS Starters with Hand /Auto Technical Data

22
Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts
1.81 0.98
Single-Phase (46.0) (24.9) 23
24
25
26
2.85 (72.4)
4.61 (117.1)
27
28
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed MS 4.55
Starter with Hand/Auto and Pilot Light (115.6) 29
General Description
The enclosed manual motor starter 30
is a cost-effective solution offering
local and remote control capability,
overload protection, and running 31
light indication on small single-phase
motor applications for 10% less than Figure 30.1-1. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
competitive devices. 32
115–230 V
Features 1 hp / 230 V
33
■ Hand/Auto switch allows starter
control locally or from a remote
source such as a building 34
■ Keyed heater packs ensure proper HAND–Toggle Closed
positioning AUTO–Toggle Open
■ Ease of installation and wiring 35
■ Trip-free handle can be locked in the
OFF position with optional handle
guard accessory (MSLG) 36
HAND
■ Red RUN pilot light provides
indication status 37
Applications AUTO
■ HVAC 38
■ Commercial construction
■ Exhaust fans
39
Pilot Light
Standards and Certifications (If Used)
■ UL® 60967-4-1 40
Specifications
■ 1 hp at 120/240 V, single-phase
41
■ 0.40–16 FLA
■ NEMA® Type 1 enclosure 42
Thermostat
Resources Motor
■ Catalog number: MST02RN1PH 43

■ Volume 5, Tab 3.1—NEMA Manual
Starters Figure 30.1-2. Wiring Diagram
■ www.eaton.mmshoa.com Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

30.1-2 Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage
Manual Motor Control January 2018
Sheet 30 004
Type B100
22 MS Manual Starters
2.38
(60.5)
Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts 1.19 2.55
23 Single-Phase (30.2)
1.56
(64.8)
2.11
(39.6) (53.6)
KO
24 0.55
(14.0)
0.73
(18.5)
KO
Indicating Light
(When Used)
25 4.16
(105.7)
1/2 Diameter Conduit
3 Single Knockouts
26 3.06
(77.7) 1 in Each End & Back
As Shown
0.88
(22.4)
27
13/64 Diameter
KO KO
2 Mounting Holes
28 1.97
(50.0)
Typical Front View Typical Side View
(Single Unit)
29
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed
Figure 30.1-3. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)
MS Starter
30
19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole
Application Description
31 MS manual single-phase starters are
5.13
designed to give positive, accurate, (130.3) 5.88
trouble-free overload protection to (149.4)
32 single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp.
Typical applications are fans, machine 5.81
(147.6) 6.72
tools, motors, HVAC, and so on. (170.7)
33 Table 30.1-1. MS Ratings
0.75
Volts hp Poles (19.1) 0.81 2.63
3.63 2.91 (20.6) 0.42
34 120/240 V, 277 Vac 1 1 or 2
(92.2) (73.7)
3.94
(10.7) (66.8)
3.50
0.44
(11.2)
3/4 Inch Pipe Top (100.1) (88.9)
120/240 Vdc 1 2
3/4 Inch Pipe Top
240 Vdc 1/4 1
35 32 Vdc 1/4 1 or 2
Figure 30.1-4. Watertight (Cast Aluminum) Figure 30.1-5. Hazardous Location
Enclosures (Cast Aluminum)
36 ■ Type 1: General Purpose
1.64
■ Type 1: Flush Mounted, General (41.7)
37 Purpose 1.52
(38.6)
■ Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight
1.06
■ Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous (26.9)
38 Locations 0.78
2.75 Mounting Purposes (19.8)
■ Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G 0.66
(69.9) (2) Holes
Hazardous Locations
39 1.38 (16.8)
0.34
■ Red pilot light available for NEMA® 1, (35.1)
(8.6)
factory-installed or field-installed kit Indicating
40 Light
Typical Specifications 1.64 4.50
(41.7) 3.28 (114.3) Handle
Manual single-phase starters shall be (83.3) Guard
41 Eaton’s Type MS or approved equal for
motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They 0.22 2.25
(5.6)
shall be built and tested in accordance (57.2)
42 with the applicable NEMA standards.
The starter shall have a “quick-make, 0.31 1.53
43 quick-break” toggle mechanism. The 1 Unit
(7.9) (38.9)
overload shall have a field adjustment
allowing up to ±10% variance in ratings Figure 30.1-6. Flush Plates
of the nominal heater value.
Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Sheet 30 005
Type B100
Type B100 22
2.38
(60.5)
Maximum 10 hp, 600 Volts 1.19 2.55
(30.2)
1.56
(64.8)
2.11
23
(39.6) (53.6)
KO
0.55
(14.0)
0.73
(18.5)
KO 24
Indicating Light
(When Used)
4.16
(105.7)
25
1/2 Diameter Conduit
3 Single Knockouts
3.06
(77.7) 1 in Each End & Back 26
As Shown
0.88
(22.4)
27
13/64 Diameter
KO KO
2 Mounting Holes
1.97
(50.0) 28
Typical Front View Typical Side View
(Single Unit)
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed 29
B100 Starter Figure 30.1-7. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)
General Description 30
19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole
MS manual single-phase starters are
designed to give positive, accurate,
trouble-free overload protection to 5.13
31
single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp. (130.3) 5.88
Typical applications are fans, machine (149.4)
tools, motors, HVAC, and so on.
32
5.81
(147.6) 6.72
Table 30.1-2. MS Ratings (170.7)
Volts hp Poles
33
0.75
120/240 V, 277 Vac 1 1 or 2 (19.1) 0.81 2.63
3.63 2.91 (20.6) 0.42
120/240 Vdc 1 2 (92.2) (73.7)
3.94
(10.7) (66.8)
3.50
0.44
(11.2)
34
240 Vdc 1/4 1 3/4 Inch Pipe Top (100.1) (88.9)
32 Vdc 1/4 1 or 2 3/4 Inch Pipe Top
Enclosures
35
Figure 30.1-8. Watertight (Cast Aluminum) Figure 30.1-9. Hazardous Location
■ Type 1: General Purpose (Cast Aluminum)
■ Type 1: Flush Mounted, General 36
Purpose 1.64
(41.7)
■ Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight 1.52 37
■ Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous (38.6)
Locations 1.06
(26.9)
■ Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G 0.78 38
Hazardous Locations 2.75 Mounting Purposes (19.8)
■ Red pilot light available for NEMA® 1, (69.9) (2) Holes 0.66
factory-installed or field-installed kit 1.38
(35.1)
(16.8)
0.34
39
(8.6)
Typical Specifications Indicating
Manual single-phase starters shall be

Light 40
1.64 4.50
Eaton’s Type MS or approved equal for (41.7) 3.28 (114.3) Handle
(83.3) Guard
motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They 41
shall be built and tested in accordance 0.22
with the applicable NEMA standards. 2.25
(5.6) (57.2)
The starter shall have a “quick-make, 42
quick-break” toggle mechanism. The
overload shall have a field adjustment 0.31 1.53
allowing up to ±10% variance in ratings
1 Unit
(7.9) (38.9) 43
of the nominal heater value.
Figure 30.1-10. Flush Plates
Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Sheet 30 006
Type XT
22 XT Manual Motor Protectors Enclosures Standards and Certifications

■ OPEN, IP40, 55, 65, NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, ■ CE approved
Maximum 50 hp, 600 Volts 12, 13 ■ UL listed File No. E245398
23 ■ Red, green and white indicates ■ UL 508 group motor and Type E
available, field installable, without compliant
change in enclosure rating (light is ■ IEC/EN 60947
24 not UL)
■ CSA File 229767, Class 3211-05
Typical Specifications ■ DIN VDE 0660 Part 100, Part 101 and
25 Manual starters shall be Eaton’s XT or
Part 102
approved equal for motors rated not Product Selection
greater than 50 hp. They shall be built
26 and tested in accordance with the When ordering, specify catalog
applicable IEC and UL standards. numbers according to the following
stipulations:
27 Features and Benefits ■ XT manual motor protectors are
■ ON/OFF rotary handle with selected based on the overload
28 lockout provision current range required for a given
■ Visible trip indication motor. This current range is deter-
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosure
■ Class 10 overload protection mined from the motor full load
29 XTPBXENCF40
■ Phase loss sensitivity
ampere rating and motor service
factor usually found on the motor
General Description ■ Ambient temperature compensa- nameplate.
30 XTPB (pushbutton) and XTPR (toggle) tion to IEC/EN 60947, VDE 0660 ■ For motors with service factors
are an economical and global solution ■ Fixed short-circuit trip—14 times less than 1.15, multiply the
to manual starting. They have a full maximum setting of overload motor FLA by 0.90 to select
31 spectrum of accessories nd enclosures FLA dial appropriate MMP.
to meet various application needs. ■ Type 2 coordination per IEC 947
They can be utilized in single- and ■ Identification markers standard on Example: For motor having FLA
32 three-phase applications. They feature starter faceplate of 6.4 A and service factor of 1.0
thermal protection with built-in over- ■ Motor applications from 0.1 A to 65 A (6.4 A x 0.90 = 5.76 A) select catalog
loads, bi-metalic and electronic. number XTPB6P3B01.
33 ■ Built-in heater and magnetic trip
Table 30.1-3. XTP Ratings elements to protect the motor See Application Note AP03402001E.
Frame Maximum Horsepower ■ Adjustment dial for setting ■ For motor with service factor of
34 Size
115 200 240 480 600
motor FLA 1.15 or greater, use motor
Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac ■ DIN rail mount nameplate full load amperes to
■ Terminal types available: select the appropriate MMP.
35 Single-Phase AC (see Wiring Diagram)
XTPB-B 2 3 5 — — ❑ Screw terminals
Example: For motor having FLA of
XTPR-B 2 3 5 — — ❑ Screw (line) and spring cage
11 A and Service factor of 1.15, select
36 XTPR-D 3 5 10 — — (load) terminals catalog number XTPR012BC1.
Three-Pole, Three-Phase AC ❑ Spring cage terminals
37 XTPB-B — 5 7.5 15 20 ■ Accessories include:

XTPR-B — 7.5 10 20 25 ❑ Front and side auxiliary contacts 1 3 5 1 3 5
❑ Trip indicating contacts
38 XTPR-D — 15 15 40 50
❑ Tamperproof cover for OLR dial I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
❑ Undervoltage release
39 ❑ Shunt trip
Figure 30.1-11. XTPB, XTPR Single- and
❑ Through-the-door operators Two-Pole Circuits with DC and AC Current
40 ❑ Enclosures
❑ Three-phase side connecting links
41
42
43

Sheet 30 007
Type XT
Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.1-4. XT Manual Motor Protector Catalog Numbering System
22
XT PR 012 B C1 23
Designation Trip Class

24
XT = XT IEC power control Type Frame Size C1 = Class 10
PB = Manual motor Current Ratings B = 45 mm
protector—pushbutton Frame B Frame D D = 55 mm 25
PR = Manual motor P16 = 0.16 A 016 = 16 A
protector—rotary P25 = 0.25 A 025 = 25 A
P40 = 0.40 A 032 = 32 A 26
P63 = 0.63 A 040 = 40 A
001 = 1 A 050 = 50 A
1P6 = 1.6 A 058 = 58 A
2P5 = 2.5 A 063 = 63 A 27
004 = 4 A
6P3 = 6.3 A
010 = 10 A 28
012 = 12 A
016 = 16 A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A 29
032 = 32 A
Dimensions
30
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
31
32
3.66 XTPAXFA _ XTPAXFA _ XTPAXFA _
(93.0) 3.66
1.77 (93.0)
1.77
(45.0) 33
(45.0)
34
1.77 0.22 1.73 1.77 1.97
(45.0) (5.5) (44.0) (45.0) (50.0) XTPAXFA _ 35
2.91 (74.0) 3.46 (88.0)
3.35 (85.0) 3.70 (94.0)
36
Figure 30.1-12. Manual Motor Protectors—XTPB Figure 30.1-13. Manual Motor Protectors, Manual Transformer
Protectors—XTPR…B
37
0.16 (4.0)
38
5.12 XTPAXFA _
2.56 39
(130.0) 1.77 (65.0) 4.92
(45.0) (125.0)
5.57
(140.0) 40
41
XTPAXFA _
1.18
(30.0) 0.30 (7.5) 42
2.17 (55.0) 4.65 (118.0)
5.00 (127.0)
43
5.71 (145.0)
6.73 (171.0)
Figure 30.1-14. Manual Motor Protector—XTPR…DC1

Sheet 30 008
Type XT
Dimensions
22
Wiring Diagrams
23 MMP Tripping Characteristics
2h
24 20
10
XTPB, XTPR Frame B
Minutes
5
2
25 1
40
20
Seconds
10
26 5
Figure 30.1-15. Frame B (0.1–32 A) XTPR 2 XTPT
Rotary Manual Motor Protectors 1
27 HxWxD
6.30 x 3.94 x 5.12 200
Milli-seconds
(160.0 x 100.0 x 130.0)
28 50
20
29 5
2
1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30
x Rated Operational Current
30 Figure 30.1-18. XTPB Pushbutton Manual Figure 30.1-20. XTPB, XTPR Frame B
Motor Protectors
31 HxWxD
2h
6.22 x 3.15 x 4.59 20 XTPR Frame D
(158.0 x 80.0 x 116.5) 10
Minutes
32 Figure 30.1-16. Frame B (0.1–32 A) XTPR
5
2
Rotary Manual Motor Protectors with 1
XTPAXFAEM20 Early-Make Front-Mount 40
33 Auxiliary Contact 20
Seconds
10
HxWxD 5
6.30 x 3.94 x 5.12
34 (160.0 x 100.0 x 130.0)
2
1
200
35
Milli-seconds
50
20
36
5
2
37 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20
x Rated Operational Current
30
Figure 30.1-19. Frame D (10–65 A) Rotary

Figure 30.1-21. XTPR Frame D
38 Figure 30.1-17. XTPB Pushbutton Manual
Motor Protective Circuit Breakers
HxWxD
Motor Protectors
9.45 x 6.30 x 7.76
39 HxWxD
5.08 x 3.55 x 4.54
(240.0 x 160.0 x 197.0)
(129.0 x 90.2 x 115.2)
40
41
42
43

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage 30.2-1
January 2018 Lighting Contactors
Sheet 30 009
Non-Combination Lighting Contactors
Non-Combination General Description Typical Specifications

22
Lighting Contactors Lighting contactors are designed to Electrically Held Lighting Contactors—
provide a safe, convenient means for Eaton’s CN35 or approved equal are
local or remote switching of tungsten rated for lighting loads of 10–300 A. 23
(incandescent filament) or ballast They are built and tested in accordance
(fluorescent and mercury arc) lamp with applicable NEMA standards.
loads. They are also suitable for other
Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors— 24
loads such as low pressure and high
pressure sodium lamp loads and Eaton’s C30CNM or approved equal are
rated for lighting loads of 30 A. They
other non-motor (resistive) loads.
shall be capable of being supplied in 25
They are not recommended for
most sign flashing loads. a 2–12 pole single unit configuration.
These lighting contactors are designed These contactors are designed to with- 26
to withstand the large initial inrush stand the large initial inrush currents
currents of tungsten lamp loads with- of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as
60 Ampere, Five-Pole Electrically Held out contact welding. The full family well as non-motor (resistive) loads 27
of lighting contactors does not require without contacts welding. The contac-
derating. tor is capable of being operated such
that it will not switch to “OFF” during 28
Application Description the control power circuit power failures.
Loads: Magnetically Latched Lighting 29

Contactors—A202 or approved equal
Ballast Lamps—Fluorescent, mercury are rated for lighting loads of 30–
vapor, metal halide sodium vapor,
quartz—600 V maximum.
4000 A. Magnetically latched enclosed 30
combination lighting contactors are
Filament Lamps—Incandescent, infra- Type ECL12 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible)
red, heating—480 V maximum, line-to- or approved equal for loads up to 31
line; 277 V maximum line-to-neutral. 30–200 A when integral short-circuit
protection is required.
Resistance Heating—Radiant and
These contactors are designed 32
convection heating, furnaces and ovens.
to withstand the large initial inrush
currents of tungsten and ballast lamp
30 Ampere, 12-Pole Mechanically Held
loads as well as non-motor (resistive) 33
loads without contacts welding.
The contactors are capable of being
“mechanically held” via a magnetic
34
latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor is operated
by a RUN signal and a STOP signal
35
preventing the contactor from switch-
ing to “OFF” during control circuit
power failure.
36
Table 30.2-1. Lighting Contactor Comparison
Ampere Number Electrically Mechanically Magnetically
37
Rating of Poles Held Held Latched
30 Ampere, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched
10 2, 3, 4 CN35 — — 38
20 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12 CN35 — —
30 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 CN35 — —
30
30
1–12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
C30CNE
—
C30CNM
—
—
A202
39
60 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 — — A202
60
100
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
CN35
CN35
—
—
—
—
40
100 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 — — A202
200 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 — — A202
200 2, 3, 4, 5 CN35 — — 41
300 2, 3, 4, 5 CN35 — —
300 2, 3 — — A202
400 2, 3 — — A202 42
43

Lighting Contactors January 2018
Sheet 30 010
Electrically Held—CN35
22 CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed) Filament Lamps—Incandescent, Table 30.2-2. Ratings—CN35 AC Lighting

Contactors—Electrically Held
infrared, heating—480 V maximum.
Maximum Number
Resistance Heating—Radiant Ampere Rating 1 of Poles
23 and convection heating, furnaces
10 2, 3, 4
and ovens.
20 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12
Cover Control—See Enclosed 30 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12
24 Control Product Guide PG.3.02.T.E 60 2, 3, 4 2, 5 2
100, 200, 300 2, 3, 4, 5
start-stop and hand-off-auto only. 400 2, 3
25 Enclosures
1 Listed ampere ratings are based on a maxi-
mum load voltage of 480 V for tungsten
Open, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12. lamp applications and 600 V for ballast or
mercury vapor type applications.
26 2 Additional power poles mounted on side(s)
20 Ampere
Auxiliary Contacts of contactor.
Eaton’s CN35 lighting contactors
27 include a NO maintaining auxiliary
contact mounted on right-hand side G A G F
C
(on 10 A, two- and three-pole devices,
28 auxiliary contact occupies 4th power A Top A Top Side
U Mtd. U
E
Mtd. Mtd. B
pole position—no increase in width). X Aux. X Aux. Aux.
Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary Mtg. Holes for

29 contact only on the right-hand contactor. #10-32 Screws Auxiliary
Contacts√
D
The 10–60 A devices will accept addi-
tional auxiliary contacts on the top
30 and/or sides. The 100–400 A sizes will
Figure 30.2-1. Open Type
accept side-mounted auxiliaries only.
31 60 Ampere
Typical Specifications
A G
C
F
General Description Electrically-held lighting contactors

3 Mtg. Holes Aux.
Top
Mtd.
Top A
Mtd. U
Aux. X E
Top
Mtd.
Side
Mtd.
B
Aux.
32 Lighting contactors are designed to han- are Eaton Type CN35 or ELC03, or for #10-32
Screws
Aux.
dle the switching of tungsten (incandes- approved equal for lighting loads of Auxiliary
10–300 A. They are built and tested D Contacts√
cent filament) or ballast (fluorescent and
33 mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other in accordance with applicable
non-motor (resistive) loads. Ratings of NEMA standards. Figure 30.2-2. Open Type, 20–30 A Sizes,
10–400 A, 1–12 poles, open or NEMA 1, Four–Six Poles
These contactors are designed to
34 3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosed. withstand the large initial inrush
currents of tungsten and ballast lamp A G F
Application Description loads as well as non-motor (resistive) C
35 loads without contact welding. Contac-
Loads: Top
Mtd.
Top A
Mtd. U
Top
Mtd.
Side
Mtd.
tors are capable of accepting up to 8 3 Mtg. Holes Aux. Aux. X E Aux. Aux. B
Ballast Lamps—Fluorescent, for #10-32
36 auxiliary contacts—top and/or side Screws
mercury vapor, sodium vapor, up to 60 A and side only up to 400 A. Auxiliary
Contacts√
D
quartz—600 V maximum. Contactors are capable of being
37 operated by AC or DC control.
Figure 30.2-3. Open Type, 20–30 A Sizes,
Four–Six Poles
3 See “Auxiliary Contacts” for type and
38 location of auxiliary contacts supplied.
Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

39 Ampere Number Dimensions in Inches (mm) Shipping
Rating of Poles Wide High Deep Mounting F G Weight
A B C Lb (kg)
40 D4 E
Open Type
10 2–4 2.00 (50.8) 3.88 (98.5) 3.49 (88.6) 1.50 (38.1) 3.38 (85.9) 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7) 1.4 (0.63)
41 20–30 2–3 2.00 (50.8) 3.88 (98.5) 3.49 (88.6) 1.50 (38.1) 3.38 (85.9) 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7) 1.45 (0.65)
20–30 4–6 4.20 (106.7) 4.35 (110.5) 3.52 (89.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.86 (98.0) 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7) 2.9 (1.3)
20–30 9 10.50 (266.7) 5.75 (146.0) 4.52 (114.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.00 (127.0) — — 4.35 (1.96)
20–30 12 10.50 (266.7) 5.75 (146.0) 4.52 (114.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.00 (127.0) — — 5.8 (2.6)
42 60 2–3 2.56 (65.1) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 3.4 (1.53)
60 4 3.46 (87.8) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 3.5 (1.57)
60 5 4.36 (110.7) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 3.55 (1.59)
43 100 2–3 3.54 (89.9) 7.17 (182.1) 5.94 (150.9) 3.00 (76.2) 6.63 (168.4) — 0.54 (13.7) 9 (4.1)
200 2–3 7.05 (179.1) 9.11 (231.4) 7.25 (184.2) 6.00 (152.4) 8.50 (215.9) — — 20 (9.0)
300 2–3 7.05 (179.1) 13.12 (333.2) 7.78 (184.2) 6.00 (152.4) 12.50 (317.5) — — 23 (10.35)
4 Center mounting slot at bottom on 10–30 A sizes only.

Sheet 30 011
Electrically Held—CN35
Enclosed Box Selection Table 30.2-5. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination Table 30.2-6. Type 1 Combination
Table 30.2-4. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting
Lighting Contactors—Electrically Held—CN35 Lighting Contactors 22
Ampere Size Box Shipping Ampere Size Box Shipping
Contactors—Electrically Held—CN35 (Poles) No. Weight No. Weight
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lb (kg) Lb (kg) 23
Contactors—without Control Power Transformers Electrically Held—3P Only—with or without
Lb (kg) Control Power Transformers
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 5 12 (5.4)
Contactors—without Control Power Transformers
10 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1) 30 A A 35 (16) 24
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5 (2.3) 60 A A 36 (16)
20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 12 (5.4)
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 2 7.3 (3.3) 100 A C 65 (30)
20 A (6P) 5 14 (6.4)
w/top adders
20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1) 200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50) 25
10 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3)
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9) 200 A with thermal-magnetic E 150 (68)
20 A (2P, 3P) 1 5.2 (2.4) breaker
20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 2 7.3 (3.3)
30 A
30 A
(5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
6
7
14 (6.4)
20 (9.1)
300 A E 160 (73) 26
w/top adders &
6P w/o top adder 400 A E 170 (77)
60 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9)
20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9 (4.1) 60 A (5P, 6P) 6 16 (7.3) Table 30.2-7. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination 27
20 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.3 (4.2) 60 A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10) Lighting Contactors
30 A (2P, 3P) 1 5.3 (2.4) 100 A (2P, 3P) 8 49 (22)
Ampere Size Box Shipping
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders 2 7.3 (3.3) 100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 57 (26) (Device) No. Weight 28
30 A (5P, 6P) 3 9.0 (4.1) 200 A (2P, 3P) 8 110 (50) Lb (kg)
30 A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 9.2 (4.2) 300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51) Electrically Held—3P Only—with or without
30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3) 400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 57) Control Power Transformers 29
30 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.7 (4.4) Contactors—with Control Power Transformers 30 A A 35 (16)
60 A (2P, 3P) 1 7 (3.2) 60 A A 36 (16)
60 A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 9.8 (4.4)
10 A
10 A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
5
7
16 (7.3)
20 (9) 100 A C 65 (30)
30
60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 9.5 (4.3) 20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 16 (7.3) 200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)
60 A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 10 (4.5) 20 A (6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11) 200 A with thermal-magnetic
breaker
E 150 (68) 31
100 A (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16) 30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 6 18 (8.2)
100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 60 (27) 30 A (5P, 6P) 6 18 (8.2) 300 A E 160 (73)
200 A (2P, 3P) 4 70 (32) 30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11) 400 A E 170 (77) 32
200 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 133 (60) 60 A (2P, 3P) 6 21 (10)
300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51) 60 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 6 23 (10)
300 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 136 (62) 60 A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10) 33
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57) 100 A (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25)
100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 64 (29)
Contactors—with Control Power Transformers
200 A (2P, 3P) 8 117 (53)
34
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 11 (5.0)
300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 3 13.1 (5.9)
10P, 12P, 20P) w/top 400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60) 35
adders
20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 6P) 2 11 (5.0)
20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/top 3 13.1 (5.9) 36
adders
20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.5 (6.1)
20 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1) 37
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4)
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders 3 13.1 (5.9)
30 A (5P, 6P) 2 12.5 (5.7)
38
30 A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1)
30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.9 (6.3) 39
30 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 14.1 (6.4)
60 A (2P, 3P) 2 12.8 (5.8)
60 A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 14 (6.4) 40
60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 14 (6.4)
60 A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 14.2 (6.4)
100 A (2P, 3P) 4 39 (18) 41
100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 67 (30)
200 A (2P, 3P) 10 117 (53)
42
200 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 140 (64)
300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)
300 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 143 (65) 43
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

Sheet 30 012
Electrically Held—Technical Data—CN35
Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data

22 Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size
CN35AN CN35BN CN35DN CN35GN CN35KN CN35NN CN35SN CN35TN
10 A 20 A 30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
23
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm
AC Magnet Coil Data
24 Pickup volts—cold 74% 74% 74% 74% 72% 75% 75% 75%
Pickup volts—hot 78% 78% 78% 78% 76% 77% 77% 77%
Pickup voltamperes 100 100 100 230 390 1158 1158 1158
Pickup watts 65 65 65 95 112 240 240 240
25 Sealed voltamperes 10 10 10 28 49.8 100 100 100
Sealed watts 3.1 3.1 3.1 7.8 13 27.2 27.2 27.2
Dropout volts—cold 45% 45% 45% 49% 50% 63% 63% 63%
26 Dropout volts—hot 46% 46% 46% 50% 52% 64% 64% 64%
Pickup time (ms) 12 12 12 20 14 23 23 23
Dropout time (ms) 12 12 12 14 11 15 15 15
27 Coil operating range –15% to +10%
Magnet coil data Class 130 (B)—105 °C Temperature Rate
UL listed rating
28 Operating temperature –20 °C to +65 °C
Maximum operating 6000
altitude
29 Mechanical life 20,000,000 10,000,000 6,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000
Wire Range
Power terminals 12–16 12–16 8–16 3–14 (upper) &/or 1/0–14 Cu 350 kcmil–6 Cu 350 kcmil–8 Cu 600 kcmil–2/0 Cu
30 stranded, stranded, stranded 6–14 (lower)
12–14 solid 12–14 solid 10 –14 solid Stranded or solid
Cu Cu Cu Cu
31 Control Terminals 12–16 Stranded
12–14 Solid Cu
Contact Kit Part No.
32 Two-pole N/A N/A N/A 6-65-7 6-43-5 6-44 6-45 6-45
Three-Pole N/A N/A N/A 6-65-8 6-43-6 6-44-2 6-45-2 6-45-2
Auxiliary contact A600, P300
33 rating See Page 30.2-5
Table 30.2-9. DC Magnet Coil Data

CN35AN CN35BN CN35DN CN35GN CN35KN CN35NN CN35SN CN35TN
10 A 20 A 30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
35
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm
Volts 24 V
36 DC Magnet Coil Data
Pickup volts—hot 80% 80% 80% 60% 61% 61% 61% 67%
Pickup voltamperes 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.2 12.0 12.0 12.0 18
37 Pickup watts
Sealed voltamperes
76.8
0.14
76.8
0.14
76.8
0.14
88.4
0.21
288.0
0.20
288.0
0.20
288.0
0.20
400.0
0.22
Sealed watts 3.36 3.36 3.36 4.96 4.75 4.75 4.75 5.3
Dropout volts—hot 60% 60% 60% 29% 22% 22% 22% 25%
38 Pickup time (ms) 22 22 22 20 38 38 38 53
Dropout time (ms) 17 17 17 13 14 14 14 14
Maximum operating 3600 2400
39 altitude
■ UL Insulation Rating—Class 130 (B), Coil Data Notes

40 105°C temperature rise
P.U. = Pickup time is the average time All data is based on a standard
■ Operational Limits—85–110%
taken from closing of the coil contactor with no auxiliary devices
of rated voltage for AC coils and
41 80%–110% of rated voltage for
circuit to main contact touch. and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.
Coil data has a ±5% range depending
DC coils D.O. = Dropout time is the average on the application, therefore specific
time taken from opening of
42 the coil circuit to main contact
data may vary.
separation.
43 Cold = Coil data with a cold coil.
Hot = Coil data with a hot coil.

Sheet 30 013
Mechanically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNM
Type C30CNM—Open Typical Specifications Technical Data and Specifications

22
(ECC—Enclosed) Mechanically held lighting contactors
Main Power Poles
are Eaton Type C30CNM or approved
equal and are rated for lighting loads Table 30.2-10. Maximum AC Voltage and
of 30 A. They are capable of being Ampere Ratings 23
supplied in a 2–12 pole single unit Load Amps Poles
Type Continuous Single-
configuration.
Phase
Three-
Phase
24
These contactors are designed to with-
stand the large initial inrush currents of Ballast 30 347 Vac 600 Vac
tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well General use 30 600 Vac 600 Vac 25
as non-motor (resistive) loads without Tungsten 20 277 Vac 480 Vac
contact welding. The contactor is capable
of being operated such that it will not
AC resistive 30 600 Vac 600 Vac 26
switch to OFF during control circuit Table 30.2-11. Maximum Horsepower Rating
power failures.
Normal Starting Duty 27
Operation Volts Horsepower
Single-Pole, Single-Phase
C30CNM Three-wire control is the choice for use
110–120 1
28
with momentary devices allowing
220–240 2
General Description operation from multiple locations. A
Three-Pole, Three-Phase
Eaton’s C30CNM 30 A mechanically
momentary pulse of energy operates 29
the contactor while a second pulse on 200–208 3
held lighting contactors are designed an alternate leg returns the contactor 220–240 5
for industrial, commercial and outdoor 440–480 10
lighting applications where efficient
to its original state. 550–600 15 30
control is required. The mechanically Two-wire control is the choice for single
held operation ensures that the con- output automatic operation or for Table 30.2-12. Control Module
tactor will not switch to OFF during operation from single-pole devices. Input Steady-State Maximum
31
control power failure. It also ensures When voltage is applied to the input Voltage Current at Rated VA
the removal of coil from the circuit for Voltage (mA)
terminals the contactor is latched into 32
noise-free operation and the elimination position (coil is removed from the circuit 12–24 Vdc 42 2
of all coil losses after the contactor is while control voltage is continuously 24 Vac 80 5
latched. The control module micropro- supplied). When control voltage is re-
cessor validates the control signal moved, the latch is disengaged and the
115–120 Vac 83 12 33
before operation, so it will not respond contactor is returned to its original state. 200–277 Vac 91 30
to momentary voltage spikes of noise. 34
The operation command has a built-in Table 30.2-13. Other Control Module
0.4 second delay to avoid multiple Characteristics
short-term commands that can cause Description Specification
35
contact fatigue or failure. Also, the
Minimum pulse duration 250 ms
feedback loop prevents the contactor (Three-wire control module)
from getting out of sequence with 36
Maximum allowable 1.8 mA
switches, even after power failures. Leakage current
EMI 35 V/m
Surge transient peak 6 kV 37
Frequency range 40–70 Hz
Auxiliary Contacts Rating: 38

■ 600 A, 24 Vdc, 24 VA
Ambient Temperature: 39
■ –13 °F to +104 °F (–25 °C to +40 °C)
Mounting Position: 40
■ Vertical three-point mounting only
Coil: 41
■ Inrush 248 VA
■ Sealed 28 VA 42
43

Sheet 30 014
Electrically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNE
22
Wire Size Components Power Poles
Table 30.2-14. Wire Specifications
Component Number Wire Range Wire Electrically Held Base Contactor
23 of (Solid or
Cables Stranded)
Temp.
Power 1 14–8 AWG 75 ºC Cu

24 Poles 2 14–8 AWG 1 75 ºC Cu
Coil 1 or 2 18–14 AWG 60 /75 ºC
Cu
25 Control 1 22–12 AWG 60º/75 ºC
Module Cu
26 Auxiliary
Contacts
1 or 2 22–12 AWG 60/75 ºC
Cu
Power Poles
1 8 AWG stranded only. The C30CN contactor accepts up to a

maximum six single- or double-pole
27 (or combinations) power poles. These
Enclosed Box Selection
can be used to form up to:
Table 30.2-15. Type 1 Non-combination Electrically Held Base Contactor
28 Lighting Contactors—C30CN 2 ■ 12NO poles maximum when six
The C30CNE20_0 electrically held base double-poles are used in NO positions
(Poles) No. Weight contactor contains a 2NO power pole (1–6) or 8NC poles maximum with
29 Lb (kg) as standard and will allow the addition four double-poles in the NC position
Lighting Contactors— of power poles to build an electrically (1–4) and 4NO poles with two double-
without Control Power Transformers held contactor up to 12 poles maximum. poles in the 2NO positions (5–6)
30 30 A (2–12) 2 9 (4.1) A mechanically held module kit can
Table 30.2-19. Power Poles
also be added to convert the electrically
Lighting Contactors—
with Control Power Transformers held contactor into a mechanically held Power Catalog
31 30 A (2–12) 3 13.5 (5.9)
contactor in the field. Poles Number
2 Consult factory for combination enclosures. Table 30.2-17. Electrically Held Base Contactor Single-pole C320PRP1
Double-pole C320PRP2
32 Table 30.2-16. Type 3R, 4X and 12 Non- Power
Poles
Catalog
Number 1
combination Lighting Contactors—C30CN 3
Ampere Size Box Shipping 2NO C30CNE20_0
33 (Poles) No. Weight 1 When ordering, select required contactor
Lb (kg) by Catalog Number and replace the magnet
Lighting Contactors— coil alpha designation in the Catalog
34 without Control Power Transformers Number (...) with the proper Code Suffix
30 A (2–12) 6 14 (6.4) from Table 30.2-18.
Lighting Contactors— Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)

35 with Control Power Transformers
Voltage Code
30 A (2–12) 7 20 (9.1) (Digit 8) Suffix
36 3 Consult factory for combination enclosures.
115–120 V 60 Hz/110 V 50 Hz A
230–240 V 60 Hz/220 V 50 Hz B
460–480 V 60 Hz/440 V 50 Hz C
37 575–600 V 60 Hz/550 V 50 Hz
200–208 V 60 Hz
D
E
265–277 V 60 Hz/240 V 50 Hz H
38 24 V 60 Hz/20 V 50 Hz
28 V 60Hz/24 V 50 Hz
T
V
347 V 60 Hz X
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 015
Mechanically Held Module Kits Auxiliary Contacts Table 30.2-22. Auxiliary Contact Blocks
Auxiliary Catalog 22
Block Number
Single-pole
Double-pole
C320AMH1
C320AMH2
23
Replacement Parts 24
Magnetic Coils for the Base Contactor
25
Auxiliary Contacts
Conversion Kits
These kits are for converting electri-

A mechanically held contactor with 26
a two-wire control module uses 1NC
cally held contactors to mechanically auxiliary contact as standard for the
held units. Kits include control mod- control wiring circuit. The mechanically 27
ule, latch, latch cover and auxiliary held contactor with a three-wire control
contacts plus installation instructions. module uses 1NO–1NC auxiliary
Conversion kits are suitable for coil contacts as standard for the control 28
voltages of 277 V and below. wiring circuit. See Table 30.2-21 for
Table 30.2-20. Mechanically Held Module Kits possible additional auxiliary contact
Coil Control Catalog
configurations. 29
Magnetic Coils
Volts Volts Number Table 30.2-21. Auxiliary Contact Configurations
Table 30.2-23. Magnetic Coils
Two-Wire Two-Wire Three-Wire 30
24–277 Vac 110–120 Vac C320MH2WA0 Coil Catalog
200–277 Vac C320MH2WH0 None None Voltage Number
24 Vac C320MH2WT0 1NO (single-pole) 1NC (double-pole)
12–24 Vdc C320MH2WT1 2NO (double-pole) 1NO (double-pole) 115–120 V 60 Hz/110 V 50 Hz 9-3242-1 31
1NC (double-pole) 1NO–1NC (double-pole) 230–240 V 60 Hz/220 V 50 Hz 9-3242-2
Three-Wire 460–480 V 60 Hz/440 V 50 Hz 9-3242-3
1NO–1NC
24–277 Vac 110–120 Vac
200–277 Vac
C320MH3WA0
C320MH3WH0
(NO single-pole — 575–600 V 60 Hz/550 V 50 Hz
200–208 V 60 Hz
9-3242-4
9-3242-5
32
NC double-pole)
24 Vac C320MH3WT0 2NO–1NC — 265–277 V 60 Hz/240 V 50 Hz 9-3242-6
12–24 Vdc C320MH3WT1 (double pole) 24 V 60 Hz/20 V 50 Hz
28 V 60 Hz/24 V 50 Hz
9-3242-7
9-3242-8
33
347 V 60 Hz 9-3242-9
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM Components—Exploded View

Sheet 30 016
Mechanically Held—C30CNM and Electrically Held—C30CNE, 30 A, 2–12 Pole
Technical Data and Specifications

22
Non-Combination C30 Lighting Contactors SCCR Charts
Table 30.2-24. Circuit Breakers—Standard Size Enclosure
23 Circuit Breakers Enclosure Type Enclosure Type Enclosure Type
(Standard Size Enclosure) (Standard Size Enclosure) (Standard Size Enclosure)
24 AC Service
Voltage
Breaker Size Circuit Breaker
Design
Type 1 SCCR Value Type 12 SCCR Value Type 3R SCCR Value
240 V 30 A Eaton T-mag 1 Eaton Box 2 14 kA Eaton Box 5 14 kA Eaton Box 5A 14 kA

25 40 A Eaton T-mag 1 or UL Listed 10 kA or UL Listed 10 kA or UL Listed 10 kA
equivalent 2 equivalent 2 equivalent 2
277 V 30 A Eaton T-mag 1 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
Eaton T-mag 1
26 480 V 40 A 5 kA 5 kA 5 kA
1 Any Eaton UL Listed thermal-magnetic circuit breaker may be used provided the breaker interrupting rating meets or exceeds the SCCR values
27 2
shown above.
Any UL Listed enclosure may be used that meets or exceeds the size of the specified Eaton enclosure.
28 Table 30.2-25. Circuit Breakers—Oversized Enclosure

Circuit Breakers Enclosure Type Enclosure Type Enclosure Type
(Oversized Enclosure) (Oversized Enclosure) (Oversized Enclosure)
29 AC Service Breaker Size Circuit Breaker Type 1 SCCR Value Type 12 SCCR Value Type 3R SCCR Value
Voltage Design
240 V 40 A Eaton T-mag 3 Eaton Box F 22 kA Eaton Box I 22 kA Eaton Box L 22 kA

30 277 V 40 A Eaton T-mag 3 or UL Listed 14 kA or UL Listed 14 kA or UL Listed 14 kA
equivalent 4 equivalent 4 equivalent 4f
31 3 Any Eaton UL Listed thermal-magnetic circuit breaker may be used provided the breaker interrupting rating meets or exceeds the SCCR values
shown above.
4 Any UL Listed enclosure may be used that meets or exceeds the size of the specified Eaton enclosure.
32 Table 30.2-26. Fuses—Standard Size Enclosure
Fuses Enclosure Type Enclosure Type Enclosure Type
33 (Standard Size Enclosure) (Standard Size Enclosure) (Standard Size Enclosure)
AC Service Fuse Size Fuse Type 1 SCCR Type 12 SCCR Type 3R SCCR
Voltage 5 and Class Vendor Value Value Value
34 600 V 30 A—Class J Eaton (Bussmann) Eaton Box 2 100 kA Eaton Box 5 100 kA Eaton Box 5A 100 kA
600 V 30 A—Class RK1 or K Eaton (Bussmann) or UL Listed 50 kA or UL Listed 50 kA or UL Listed 50 kA
35 600 V 30 A—Class H Eaton (Bussmann) 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
5 600 volts covers all lower voltage values (200 to 600 Vac). Fuse interrupt rating must meet or exceed SCCR value shown above.
36
Table 30.2-27. Fuses—Oversized Enclosure
Fuses Enclosure Type Enclosure Type Enclosure Type
37 (Oversized Enclosure) (Oversized Enclosure) (Oversized Enclosure)
AC Service Fuse Size Fuse Type 1 SCCR Type 12 SCCR Type 3R SCCR
Voltage 7 and Class Vendor Value Value Value
38 600 V 30 A—Class RK5 or K Eaton (Bussmann) Eaton Box F 100 kA Eaton Box I 100 kA Eaton Box L 100 kA
600 V 30 A—Class H Eaton (Bussmann) or UL Listed 10 kA or UL Listed 10 kA or UL Listed 10 kA
39 600 V 40 A—Class J or RK1 Eaton (Bussmann) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
7 600 volts covers all lower voltage values (200 to 600 Vac). Fuse interrupt rating must meet or exceed SCCR value shown above.
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 017
Wiring Diagrams 22
C30CNE Electrically Held View B
Optional Pilot Devices for Electrically Held Contactor
23
Line Load * If Used
1
ON
OFF Pushbutton
ON
24
2 Pushbutton
L1 L2
* *
3
Fuse
A2
Coil
A1
Fuse
25
Remote
OFF
4 Auxiliary
Contact
26
Remote Auxiliary
5 ON Contact
OFF
27
6
ON and OFF Pushbuttons
View A
SS
ON 28
A1 A2 OFF AUTO
Optional Coil Optional L1 L2
Auxiliary
Contacts
Auxiliary
Contacts
*
Fuse Coil Fuse
*
29
A2 A1
Coil Remote
Voltage Device Auxiliary
CONTROL
Contact
OFF 30
Refer to View “B” for Control Connections
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
31
ON
L1
* *
L2 32
ON
Fuse OFF Coil Fuse
A2 A1
AUTO 33
Remote Auxiliary
Device Contact
OFF
34
OFF/ON/AUTO or HAND/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
35
Figure 30.2-5. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 018
22 C30CNM Mechanically Held View B

Refer to View “A” for 2-/3-Wire Control Options Optional Pilot Devices for 2-Wire Control
Line Load SS
Electronic-Module * If Used
1 OFF ON
23 (AUTO) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Fuse
*
2 Coil
Control Voltage
24 Voltage OFF ON *
3 Coil Fuse
A2 A1
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
25 4 Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 *
ON
5 OFF Fuse
26 Control OFF ON AUTO
Coil
Voltage
6 Voltage *
Remote Fuse
Device Coil
27 View A
A2 A1
HAND/OFF/AUTO or ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 View C
28 Not Used
Optional Pilot Devices for 3-Wire Control
C Remote ”NO“ * If Used
OFF Auxiliary
Optional A1 A2 Optional Electronic-Module
29 “N/O” Coil “NC” OFF
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Fuse
*
Aux. Aux.
Contacts Coil Contact
Voltage ON Coil
Control
30 L
2-WIRE CONTROL Voltage OFF ON
Voltage
*
”NC“ Coil Fuse
Refer to View “B” for Control Connections Remote A2 A1
ON Auxiliary
Electronic-Module
31 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
ON & OFF Pushbuttons
”NO“ Electronic-Module
L Auxiliary P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 *
32 Optional A1 A2 Optional OFF
Fuse
“N/O” Coil “NC” Coil
Aux. Aux. Control Voltage
Contacts Voltage ON *
Contact
33 O
Coil
Voltage OFF ON ”NC“
Auxiliary A2
Coil
A1
Fuse
C
3-WIRE CONTROL
Refer to View “C” for Control Connections OFF/ON Selector Switch with Spring Return to Center
34
Figure 30.2-6. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
35
Dimensions
36
.35 SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW END VIEW
(9.0)
2 “NO” 2 “NC”
37 Power
Pole Aux P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Aux
ON ON ON ON ON ON
Contacts Contacts
1 “NO” 1 “NC” 3.86
38 Aux
Contact
Aux (98.0)
Contact
Optional
Power 6.50
39 Pole (165.1)
Optional “NC” 7.39
Aux Contacts (187.6) NOTE:
40 1 Mounting dimensions remain the same
for 1 to 12 poles.
Optional “NO” 2 Line and Load terminals are interchangeable.
Aux Contacts P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
3 Up to 2NO and 2NC auxiliary contacts can be
41 added onto the base product.
4 Same power pole can be configured as
Mounting Holes NO type or NC type in pole positions 1 – 4;
Accept A1 A2 NO type only in positions 5 – 6.
42 .35 (9.0)
#10 Screws
.22 (5.5) 3.75 (95.3)
3.86 (98.0) 4.18 (106.2) .59 (14.9)
43
Figure 30.2-7. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Sheet 30 019
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)—A202
A202–Open (ECL04–Enclosed) Typical Specifications The contactor shall be operated

22
by a RUN signal and a STOP signal
Magnetically-held lighting contactors preventing the contactor from switch-
are Eaton’s Type A202 or approved ing to “OFF” during control circuit
equal for lighting loads of 30–400 A. power failures. 23
Magnetically-held combination lighting
contactors are Type ECL15 (breaker) or Table 30.2-28. Ratings—Latched AC
ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for Lighting Contactors 24
loads of 30–200 A when integral short Holding Circuit Auxiliary Contact or
circuit protection is required. Pushbutton Station not Included
These contactors are designed to Continuous Amperes Number 25

(Enclosed) of Poles
withstand the large initial inrush
60 Ampere Size
currents of tungsten and ballast lamp 30 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
loads as well as non-motor (resistive) 60 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 26
General Description loads without contacts welding. 100 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
AC lighting contactors provide a safe The contactors are capable of being 200 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
convenient means for local or remote “magnetically held” via a magnetic 300 2, 3 27
switching of relatively large tungsten, 400 2, 3
latch design using a permanent magnet.
fluorescent or mercury arc lamp loads.
They are also suitable for low pressure Table 30.2-29. Non-Combination Lighting Contactors—6 to 12 Pole
28
and high pressure sodium lamp loads.
Continuous Number Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)
These lighting contactors are designed Amperes
(Enclosed)
of Poles Configuration Open Type 29
to withstand the large initial inrush Wide A High B
currents of tungsten lamp loads with-
out contact welding. They are full rated 30 6
8
3x3
4x4
7.13 (181.1)
7.13 (181.1)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
30
and do not require derating as do stan-
10 5x5 10.63 (270.0) 4.46 (113.3)
dard motor control contactors. 12 4x4x4 12.38 (314.5) 6.88 (174.8)
60 6 3x3 7.13 (181.1) 4.46 (113.3)
31
Operation (Magnetic Latch) 8 4x4 10.63 (270.0) 4.46 (113.3)
A permanent magnet is built into the 10 5x5 10.63 (270.0) 4.46 (113.3)
contactor structure that will maintain 12 5x5x2 15.00 (381.0) 6.88 (174.8) 32
the contactor in its energized state 100 6 3x3 9.75 (247.7) 6.88 (174.8)
8 5x3 12.38 (314.5) 6.88 (174.8)
indefinitely without using control
power. When energized, a DC current
10 5x5 15.00 (381.0) 6.88 (174.8) 33
12 5x5x2 34.13 (866.9) 27.50 (698.5)
is applied to the latch coil producing 200 6 3x3 9.75 (247.7) 6.88 (174.8)
a magnetic field that reinforces the
polarity of the permanent magnet,
8
10
5x3
5x5
12.38 (314.5)
15.00 (381.0)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
34
pulling in the contactor. The current 12 5x5x2 34.13 (866.9) 27.50 (698.5)
to the coil is disconnected by the coil
clearing interlock. In order to drop out
35
the contactor, it is necessary to apply Connections for Contactor
Connections for
a field through the STOP coil in the Control Stations
Fig. 1
Top
Front V iew Diagram
Line 36
reverse direction to the permanent Fig. A Momentary
Pushbutton
Auxiliary
Contact
Red
When Supplied “C”
(Not Supplied)
magnet. This momentarily cancels the Off
1
On
+
magnetic attraction and the contactor B
2 3
N.C. N.O. ~ ~
– 37
8
8
L2
drops out. Fig. B Maintained
3
2
3 2
Control
Module
Pushbutton
Black M M
1 On Off
Off On
Enclosures 2 3
White
Red
38
Open and NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X and 12. C A Separate Control
Connect separate control
lines to the No. 1 terminal
Specifications Figure 30.2-8. Open Type

on the remote control
station and to the “L2”
terminal on the contactor.
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
Poles to Load
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
39
■ Terminals: Elementary Diagram
M Control Voltage Lines
❑ All except M
1
Off
On
1
Top
3 N.C. Red
Black
L2
~ ~
+ “C”
40
30 A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Al/Cu Line
M
M
Load Momentary M
Red
Pushbutton On –
White M
❑ 30 A devices . . . . . . . . . . . Cu only M 2 N.O.
Off
Off 1 On
Red
41
■ Ballast load 600 Vac, breaking Maintained
Pushbutton
all lines
■ Tungsten lamp loads, maximum volts: Figure 30.2-9. Connection Diagram 42
❑ Line-to-line. . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Vac
❑ Line-to-neutral. . . . . . . . . 277 Vac
43

Sheet 30 020
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)—A202
Enclosed Box Selection Table 30.2-31. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Table 30.2-32. Type 1 Combination Lighting
22 Table 30.2-30. Type 1 Non-combination
Non-combination Lighting Contactors— Contactors
Magnetically Latched—A202 Ampere Size Box Shipping
Lighting Contactors—Magnetically
Ampere Size Box Shipping No. Weight
Latched—A202
23 (Poles) No. Weight Lb (kg)
Ampere Size Box Shipping Lb (kg) Magnetically Latched—Non-reversing (3P Only)—
(Poles) No. Weight with or without Control Power Transformers
Contactors—without Control Power Transformers
Lb (kg)
24 Contactors—without Control Power Transformers
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 13 (5.9) 30 A A 35 (16)
30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 21 (10) 60 A A 36 (16)
30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9)
30 A (20P) 8 46 (21) 100 A C 65 (30)
25 30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13 (5.9)
60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 14 (6.4) 200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)
30 A (20P) 4 35 (16)
60 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10) 200 A with thermal- E 150 (68)
60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.7 (3.9) magnetic breaker
26 60 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13.5 (6.1)
60 A (20P) 8 48 (22)
300 A E 140 (64)
100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 50 (23)
60 A (20P) 4 40 (18) 400 A E 190 (86)
100 A (6P, 8P, 10P,12P) 9 58 (26)
100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 40 (18)
27 100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 85 (39)
100 A (20P) 10 100 (45)
Table 30.2-33. NEMA 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination
200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 52 (24) Lighting Contactors
100 A (20P) 9 100 (45)
200 A (20P) 10 105 (48)
28 200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 46 (21)
300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)
No. Weight
200 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 95 (43)
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57) Lb (kg)
200 A (20P) 9 110 (50)
29 300 A (2P, 3P) 10 115 (52)
Contactors—with Control Power Transformers Magnetically Latched—Non-reversing (3P Only)—
with or without Control Power Transformers
30 A (2P, 3P) 6 15 (6.8)
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)
30 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 28 (13) 30 A A 35 (16)
Contactors—with Control Power Transformers
30 30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.5 (5.7)
30 A (20P) 8 54 (25) 60 A A 36 (16)
60 A (2P, 3P) 6 16 (7.3) 100 A C 65 (30)
30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 17 (7.7)
60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 29 (13) 200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)
31 30 A (20P) 4 39 (18)
60 A (20P) 8 55 (25) 200 A with thermal- E 150 (68)
60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.7 (5.8) magnetic breaker
100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 57 (26)
60 A (6P, 8P, 10P) 3 17.5 (7.9) 300 A with disconnect switch 72” 375 (170)
32 60 A (12P) 9 87 (39)
100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 65 (30)
300 A with thermal- E 160 (73)
100 A (20P) 10 112 (51) magnetic breaker
60 A (20P) 4 44 (20)
200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 59 (27) 400 A with disconnect switch 72” 425 (193)
100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 47 (21)
33 100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 92 (42)
300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54) 400 A with thermal- E 210 (95)
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60) magnetic breaker
100 A (20P) 9 107 (49)
34 200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 53 (24)
200 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 102 (46)
200 A (20P) 9 117 (53)
35 300 A (2P, 3P) 10 122 (55)
400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 021
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole Only—Type ECL
Combination Lighting ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or These contactors shall be designed to
22
approved equal for loads of 30–200 A withstand the large initial inrush cur-
Contactors when integral short-circuit protection rents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads
is required. as well as non-motor (resistive) loads
Types ECL12, ECL13, ECL14 without contact welding. Contactors 23
These contactors are designed to shall be capable of accepting up to eight
and ECL15 withstand the large initial inrush auxiliary contacts—top and/or side up to
General Description
currents of tungsten and ballast lamp 60 A and side only up to 400 A. Contac- 24
loads as well as non-motor (resistive) tors shall be capable of being operated
Catalog Number ECL12, ECL13, ECL14 loads without contact welding. The by AC or DC control.
and ECL15 combination lighting con- contactors are capable of being 25
tactors offer convenient installation of “magnetically held” via a magnetic Features
switching and overcurrent protection latch design using a permanent magnet.
■ Disconnect devices—either a
in a single enclosure. Combination The contactor shall be operated by
Series C circuit breaker or a fusible
26
lighting contactors are ideally suited a RUN signal and a STOP signal
preventing the contactor from switch- disconnect switch
for industrial and commercial lighting
applications or where a lighting circuit ing to “OFF” during control circuit ■ Handle mechanism—flange 27
may have to be disconnected for peri- power failures. mounted
odic maintenance. They may also be ■ UL listed
Electrically held combination lighting
applied on resistance heating loads. contactors are Eaton Type ECL14 ■ UL service entrance approved for 28
(breaker) or ECL12 (fusible) or NEMA 3R outdoor enclosure
Typical Specifications approved equal for loads of 30–400 A ■ Extra room for modifications such
Magnetically latched combination when integral short-circuit protection as a 24-hour time clock
29
lighting contactors are Eaton’s Type is required.
30
Table 30.2-34. Enclosed Lighting Contactor Catalog Numbering System 31
EC L 12 D 1 A 3 E - X 32
Design Modification Codes
L = CN35 or A202 lighting contactor (See PG03300001E) 33
C = C30CN lighting contactor
Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings
Class
A = None J = 200 A/600 V R
34
03 = Non-combination electrically held lighting contactor B = 30 A/250 V R K = 400 A/250 V R
C = 30 A/600 V R L = 400 A/600 V R
04 = Non-combination mechanically held/magnetically
latched lighting contactor
D = 60 A/250 V R M = 600 A/250 V R 35
E = 30 A/600 V R N = 600 A/600 V R
12 = Combination electrically held lighting contactor— F = 100 A/250 V R P = 800 A/600 V R
fusible disconnect G = 100 A/600 V R T = By description
13 = Combination magnetically latched lighting H = 200 A/250 V R 36
contactor—fusible disconnect Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Ratings
14 = Combination electrically held lighting
contactor—thermal-magnetic circuit breaker
A = None
D = 20 A
F = 60 A
G = 100 A
J = 300 A
K = 400 A
M = 800 A
T = By description
37
15 = Combination magnetically latched lighting E = 30 A H = 200 A L = 600 A
contactor—thermal-magnetic circuit breaker
38
Number of Poles 1
Ampere Size 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Poles required
A = 10 A D = 60 A G = 300 A A = 10 Poles
B = 12 Poles
39
B = 20 A E = 100 A H = 400 A
C = 30 A F = 200 A J = 600 A C = 20 Poles
Combination Devices = Three-pole only
40
Enclosure Types
Coil Voltage
1 = Type 1—General purpose
2 = Type 3R—Rainproof A = 120/60 110/50
B = 240/60 220/50
K
L
= 240/50
= 380/50
T = 24/60
U = 24/50
41
3 = Type 4—Watertight (painted)
4 = Type 4X—Watertight (304-grade stainless steel) C = 480/60 440/50 M = 415/50 V = 32/50
6 = Type 7/9—Explosion proof D = 600/60 550/50 P = 12 Vdc W = 48/60
8 = Type 12—Dust-tight E = 208/60 Q = 24 Vdc X = 104–120/60 42
9 = Type 4X—Watertight (316-grade stainless steel) G = 550/50 R = 48 Vdc Y = 48/50
H = 277/60 S = 125 Vdc Z = By description
J = 208–240/60 43
1 For normally closed poles, see PG03300001E.
2 C30CN available in 30 A only.

Sheet 30 022
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole Only—Type ECL
Table 30.2-35. Ratings—Latched ELC15 Table 30.2-39. Factory Modifications

22 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect Description Enclosure Used On
Continuous Circuit Breaker Standard Combination
Amperes Ampere System
23 (Enclosed) Rating Voltage Control transformers: Any
480 to 120 V control transformer ■ ■
30 30 600 100 VA extra capacity transformer ■ ■
24 60 60 600 200 VA extra capacity transformer ■ ■
100 100 600 240 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder ■ ■
200 200 600 208 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder ■ ■
415 to 110 V control transformer with fuse in holder ■ ■
25 Table 30.2-36. ELC13—Fusible Disconnect 277 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder ■ ■
Switch Lightning arrester Any
Undervoltage relay
26 Continuous
Amperes
Fuse Clip On-off pushbutton ■ ■
Ampere System Hand-off-auto selector switch ■ ■
(Enclosed) Rating Voltage Addition of photoelectric receptacle and relay with —
27 30 30 250, 600
photo cell Installed (two-wire circuit) ■ ■
60 60 250, 600 24-hour time clock, 120 V — ■ ■
100 100 250, 600 24-hour time clock with day omission, 120 V ■ ■
28 200 200 250, 600 7-day time clock, 120 V ■ ■
Cover plate for use in place of watertight hub on enclosure top ■ ■
Table 30.2-37. Ratings—Electrically-held
29 ELC14 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Continuous Circuit Breaker
Amperes Ampere System
30 (Enclosed) Rating Voltage
30 30 600
60 60 600
31 100 100 600
200 200 600
300 300 600
32 400 1 400 600
1 UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
33 Table 30.2-38. ELC12—Fusible

Disconnect Switch
Continuous Fuse Clip
34 Amperes Ampere System
(Enclosed) Rating Voltage
35 30 30 250, 600
60 60 250, 600
100 100 250, 600
36 200 200 250, 600
300 300 250, 600
400 2 400 250, 600
37 2 UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018 Motor Starters—Electromechanical
Sheet 30 023
Freedom Line—General Description
NEMA Motor Starters Features Standards and Certifications

22
Freedom Series Freedom NEMA ■ Standard: Designed to meet or
exceed UL, NEMA and CSA
■ Adjustable bimetallic ambient
compensated overload relays
■ UL listed: UL File #E1491, Guide 23
#NLDX—Open; UL File #E176513—
with interchangeable heater
Enclosed Combination Motor Con-
packs—available in three basic sizes,
covering applications up to 900 hp—
trollers; UL File #E19224—Enclosed 24
Non-Combination Motor Controllers;
reducing the number of different
UL File #E195239—Enclosed Power
contactor/overload relay combina-
tions that have to be stocked. Fixed
Conversion Equipment 25
heater overloads are optional ■ CSA certified: CSA File #LR353,
Class #321104 Open and NEMA 1
■ Electronic overload relay (C440)
available as a stand-alone unit
Enclosed 26
and assembled with a Freedom Certified Type 2 Coordination
contactor Eaton’s Freedom Series NEMA start- 27
■ A full line of snap-on accessories— ers are now UL certified to achieve IEC
top and side mounted auxiliary 947 Type 2 coordination against
NEMA AN19DN0A5E005 contacts, solid-state and pneumatic 100,000 A short-circuit fault currents. 28
NEMA Size 1 timers, etc. Any brand of properly selected fuse
■ Straight-through wiring—line lugs can be used. Type 2 coordination
General Description at top, load lugs at bottom means that the starter will be suitable 29
The Freedom Series starters and ■ Horizontal or vertical mounting for further use following a short-circuit
contactors listed in this catalog on upright panel for application fault.
feature a compact, space-saving freedom 30
Short-Circuit Protection
design and high strength, impact ■ Screw type power terminals have
Fuses and inverse-time circuit breakers
and temperature-resistant insulating captive, backed-out self-lifting
materials. Starters and contactors pressure plates with ± screws—
may be selected per Article 430, Part D 31
of the National Electrical Code® to
are available in the NEMA (National reduced wiring time
protect motor branch circuits from
Electrical Manufacturers’ Association) ■ Accessible terminals for easy wiring. 32
fault conditions. If higher ratings or
style. The NEMA devices are sized Optional fingerproof shields avail- settings are required to start the motor,
based on traditional NEMA able to prevent electrical shock do not exceed the maximum as listed
classifications. 33
■ Top located coil terminals conve- in Exception No. 2, Article 430.52.
nient and readily accessible. 45 mm
contactor magnet coils have three
terminals, permitting either top or 34
diagonal wiring—easy to replace
European or U.S. style starters
or contactors without changing 35
wiring layout
■ Designed to meet or exceed NEMA,
UL, CSA, VDE, BS and other interna- 36
tional standards and listings
■ American engineering—built by
Eaton, using the latest in statistical
37
process control methods to pro-
duce high quality, reliable products 38
■ Sized based on standard NEMA
classifications
■ Easy coil change and inspectable/ 39
replaceable contacts
■ Available in open and NEMA Type 1,
3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosures 40
41
42
43

Motor Starters—Electromechanical January 2018
Sheet 30 024
Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA Contactors and Starters
Technical Data
22
NEMA Sizes 00-8
Table 30.3-1. AC Coil Data
23 NEMA Motor Maximum P.U. Volts P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts Maximum Operation P.U. D.O.
Sizes Voltage hp Rating Cold Hot VAR VA Watts VAR VA Watts Cold Hot Rate Operations/Hour Time ms Time ms
24 00 200 1-1/2 74% 78% 64 80 49 7.1 7.5 2.4 45% 46% 12,000 12 12
230 1-1/2
460 2
25 575 2
0 200 3 74% 78% 78 100 65 9.2 10 3.1 45% 46% 12,000 12 12
230 3
26 460
575
5
5
1 200 7-1/2 74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14
27 230
460
7-1/2
10
575 10
2 200 10 74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14
28 230 15
460 25
575 25
29 3 200 25 72% 76% 374 390 112 48 49.8 13 50% 52% 7200 14 11
230 30
460 50
30 575 50
4 200 40 73% 76% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 54% 56% 2400 28 14
230 50
31 460
575
100
100
5 200 75 75% 77% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 63% 64% 2400 25 13
230 100
32 460 200
575 200
33 General Coil Data Table 30.3-2. Coil Data Notes

Description All data is based on a standard
■ Coil Offering—tape wound: contactor with no auxiliary devices
34 ❑ NEMA Sizes 00–0 P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.
from closing of the coil circuit to main Coil data has a ±5% range depending
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
contact touch.
on the application, therefore specific
35 ■ Coil Offering—encapsulated: D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken data may vary.
from opening of the coil circuit to main
❑ NEMA Sizes 1–3
contact separation.
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)
36 Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
■ Coil Offering—encapsulated: Hot Coil data with a hot coil.
37
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
■ Operational Limits:
38 ❑ 85% to 110% of rated voltage—AC
❑ 80% to 110% of rated voltage—DC
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 025
Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA Contactors and Starters
Table 30.3-3. DC Coil Data

NEMA Motor P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts P.U. D.O. Maximum Operation Mechanical 22
Sizes Voltage Amperes Watts Volts (Hot) Amperes Watts (Hot) Time ms Time ms Rate Operations/Hour Life Millions
00 and 0 12 6.4 76.8 80% 0.28 3.36 60% 22 17 3600 5 23

24 3.2 76.8 80% 0.14 3.36 60% 22 17 3600 5
48 1.6 76.8 80% 0.07 3.36 60% 22 17 3600 5
120 0.64 76.8 80% 0.028 3.36 60% 22 17 3600 5 24
1 and 2 12 15.4 126 68% 0.42 4.98 30% 21 12 3600 2
24 6.2 88.4 60% 0.21 4.96 29% 20 13 3600 2
48 2.9 76.2 56% 0.11 5.04 28% 20 14 3600 2
120 1.1 67.3 53% 0.041 4.87 29% 20 16 3600 2 25
3 12 24 293 65% 0.40 4.84 23% 39 14 3600 2
24 12 288 61% 0.20 4.75 22% 38 14 3600 2
48 6.1 295 62% 0.097 4.67 22% 37 14 3600 2 26
120 2.5 298 61% 0.038 4.57 22% 37 16 3600 2
4 and 5 24 18 400 67% 0.22 5.3 25% 53 14 2400 2
48 9.0 400 67% 0.11 5.2 25% 49 16 2400 2 27
120 3.3 450 65% 0.05 5.4 28% 56 19 2400 2
240 1.7 440 64% 0.02 4.9 26% 49 21 2400 2
28
General Coil Data Table 30.3-4. Coil Data Notes
■ Coil Offering—tape wound:
contactor with no auxiliary devices 29
P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.
from closing of the coil circuit to main Coil data has a ±5% range depending
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
contact touch.
■ Coil Offering—encapsulated: D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken
on the application, therefore specific 30
data may vary.
from opening of the coil circuit to main
contact separation.
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A) Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
31
■ Coil Offering—encapsulated: Hot Coil data with a hot coil.
❑ NEMA Sizes 4–5 32
❑ UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
■ Operational Limits: 33
❑ 85% to 110% of rated voltage—AC
❑ 80% to 110% of rated voltage—DC
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 026
Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA
Table 30.3-5. Specifications—Sizes 00–3

CN15A CN15B CN15D CN15G CN15K
NEMA Size 00 NEMA Size 0 NEMA Size 1 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3
23
Configuration
Number of poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3
24 Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
4th pole NO (1)
Top (4) or side (4)
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
Side NO (1)
Left side (4) or right side (3)
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 65 mm 90 mm
25 Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
Continuous ampere ratings (I) 9A 18 A 27 A 45 A 90 A
Maximum horsepower (hp)
26 Single-phase 115 V 1/3 1 2 3 7-1/2
230 V 1 2 3 7-1/2 15
Three-phase 200 V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 10 25
27 230 V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 30
460 V 2 5 10 25 50
575 V 2 5 10 25 50
28 Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10%
Operating temperature –20 °C to +65 °C –20 °C to +65 °C –20 °C to +65 °C –20 °C to +65 °C –20 °C to +65 °C
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m) 6000 (1828) 6000 (1828) 6000 (1828) 6000 (1828) 6000 (1828)
29 Mechanical life 20,000,000 20,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 6,000,000
Electrical life (480 V/60 Hz)
AC-3 4,000,000 3,000,000 5,000,000 3,500,000 1,700,000
AC-4 90,000 85,000 200,000 62,000 80,000
30 Wire range
Power terminals 12–16 stranded, 8–16 stranded, 8–14 stranded 2–14 (upper) and/or 1/0–14 Cu
12–14 solid Cu 10–14 solid Cu or solid Cu 6–14 (lower)
31 stranded or solid Cu
Control terminals 12–16 stranded, 12–16 stranded, 12–16 stranded, 12–16 stranded, 12–16 stranded
12–14 solid Cu 12–14 solid Cu 12–14 solid Cu 12–14 solid Cu 12–14 solid Cu
32 Power terminal torque 7 15 20 40 (14–8 AWG) 35 (14–10 AWG)
Line and load—lb-in 45 (6–4 AWG) 40 (8 AWG)
50 (3 AWG) 45 (6–4 AWG)
33 50 (3–1/0 AWG)
Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 027
Table 30.3-6. Specifications—Sizes 4–5

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size 22
CN15N CN15S
NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5
23
Configuration
Number of poles 2, 3 2, 3
Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
Side NO (1)
Side NO (1)
24
Frame size 180 mm 180 mm
Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 25
Continuous ampere ratings (i) 135 A 270 A
Maximum horsepower (hp)
Single-phase 115 V — — 26
230 V — —
Three-phase 200 V 40 75
230 V 50 100 27
460 V 100 200
575 V 100 200
Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10% 28
Operating temperature –20 °C to +65 °C –20 °C to +65 °C
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m) 6000 (1828) 6000 (1828)
Mechanical life 5,000,000 5,000,000
29
Electrical life (480 V/60 Hz)
AC-3 800,000 500,000
AC-4 70,000 34,000
Wire range
30
Power terminals Open—3/0–8 Cu; 750 kcmil—2 or
Enclosed—250 kcmil–6 Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al
Control terminals 12–16 stranded, 12–14 solid Cu 12–16 stranded, 12–14 solid Cu
31
Power terminal torque 200 550
Line and load—lb-in
Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 028
Table 30.3-7. 380V , 50 Hz Starters—Maximum hp Ratings Table 30.3-12. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—
22 Description NEMA Size AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2
Open and Enclosed
1 2 3 4 5 6
Terminal Wire Catalog
23 Maximum hp 10 25 50 75 150 300 Size 4 Number
Power Terminals—Load—Cu Only
Table 30.3-8. Motor FLA Current Ranges (Stranded or Solid)
24 Description NEMA Size 32 A 14–6 AWG C306DN3B
11 1 2 3 4 5 6 75 A 14–2 AWG C306GN3B
45 A 14–6 AWG C396A_
25 1.15 to 0.47–3.81 3.15–27.00 3.15–45.00 9.90–90.00 9.90–135.00 38.30–270.00 38.30–540.00 4 Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size:
1.25 S.F. Sizes 00–0 to 8 AWG and Sizes 1–2 to
1.0 S.F. 0.51–4.14 3.43–27.00 3.43–45.00 10.80–90.00 10.80–135.00 41.70–270.00 41.70–540.00 2 AWG.
26 1 Size 1 Lower Current Range for motor hp range 1/4 hp to 2 hp at 460 V.
Table 30.3-13. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—
Table 30.3-9. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2—Open and Enclosed AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 3–8—
27 NEMA Cu
Open and Enclosed
Size Only NEMA Wire
Power Terminals—Line Size Size
28 00 #12–#16 stranded, #12–#14 solid C306 Power Terminals—Line and Load
0 #8–#16 stranded, #10–#14 solid 3 10–14 AWG Al Cu
1 #8–#14 stranded or solid 4 Open–#8–#3/0 Cu
29 2 #3–#14 (upper) and/or #6–#14 (lower) stranded or solid 2 Enclosed–#6 250 kcmil–Al Cu
2 Two compartment box lug. 5 750 kcmil–#2 or
(2) #3/0 250 kcmil–Al Cu
30 Table 30.3-10. Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit 3
AC Volts 120 V 240 V 480 V 600 V Table 30.3-14. C306 Control Terminals—
NC Contact B600 Cu Only
31 Make and break amperes 30 15 7.5 6 Description
Break amperes 3 1.5 0.75 0.6
Continuous amperes 5 5 5 5 (2) #12–#16 stranded
32 NO Contact C600 (2) #12–#14 solid
Make and break amperes 15 7.5 3.375 3

Break amperes 1.5 0.75 0.375 0.3
33 Continuous amperes 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
3 DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only.
34 Table 30.3-11. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500 A

Description Specification
35 45 mm 55 mm
Capacity
Load terminals
36 Terminal capacity 12–10 AWG (4–6 mm2)
8–6 AWG (6–16 mm2)
6–1 AWG (16–50 mm2)
Tightening torque 20–25 lb-in (2.3–2.8 Nm) 25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm)
25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm)
37 Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals
Terminal capacity 2 x (18–12) AWG 2 x (18–12) AWG
Tightening torque 5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm) 5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm)
38 Voltages
Insulation voltage U i (three-phase) 690 Vac 690 Vac
Insulation voltage U i (control) 500 Vac 500 Vac
39 Rated impulse withstand voltage 6000 Vac 6000 Vac
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 029
Freedom Line—Technical Data
Electrical Life—AC-3 and AC-4

Utilization Categories
100,000,000
22
Life Load Curves
23
Eaton’s Freedom Series NEMA 10,000,000
contactors have been designed
Operations
and manufactured for superior life 24
performance in any worldwide
application. All testing has been based
on requirements as found in NEMA 1,000,000
25
and UL standards and conducted by
Eaton. Actual application life may
Size 00
Size 2
Size 3
Size 0
Size 1
Size 4
Size 5
vary depending on environmental 26
conditions and application duty cycle. 100,000
9 18 27 45 90 135 270
Utilization Categories 1 10 100 1000
Break Amperes
NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00 – 5, 480 V 60 Hz
27
AC-1—Non-inductive or slightly
inductive loads, such as resistance 100,000,000
furnaces and heating. 28
AC-2—Starting of slip-ring motors.
10,000,000
AC-3—Squirrel cage motors; starting, 29
switching off motors during running.
Operations
1,000,000
AC-4—Squirrel cage motors; starting,
plugging, inching or jogging.
30
Note: AC-3 tests are conducted at rated
device currents and AC-4 tests are conducted
100,000 31
Size 00
at six times rated device currents. All tests
Size 0
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
have been run at 460 V, 60 Hz.
10,000
54 108 153 270 540 822 1620
32
Contactor Choice 1 10 100 1000 10,000
■ Decide what utilization category Break Amperes
your application is and choose the
NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00 – 5, 480 V 60 Hz 33
appropriate curve
Figure 30.3-10. AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories
■ Locate the intersection of the
life-load curve of the appropriate AN19 Competitive Retrofit Kits
34
contactor with the applications
operational current (Ie), as found The retrofit kits provide a packaged Kit contents
on the horizontal axis solution to replace competitive starters ■ Competitive mounting plate 35
with the Freedom AN19 starter using
■ Read the estimated contact life ■ AN19 starter
existing hole patterns. Suitable for
along the vertical axis in number replacement of Allen-Bradley, ■ Remote reset module 36
of operational cycles Square D, GE and Siemens starters. ■ NO 10250T pushbutton
■ RESET pushbutton legend plate
■ 16 gauge control wire 37
Table 30.3-15. AN19 Competitive Retrofit Kit—
Product Selection 38
Size Description Catalog Number
1 120 Vac coil, AN19DN0A5E020-CRK 39

4–20 A
overload
2 120 Vac coil,
9–45 A
AN19GN0A5E045-CRK 40
overload
3 120 Vac coil,
20–100 A
AN19KN0A5E100-CRK 41
overload
4 120 Vac coil, AN19NN0A5E140-CRK
28–140 A 42
overload
5 120 Vac coil, AN19SN0A5E300-CRK
60–300 A 43
overload

Sheet 30 030
Freedom Line—Product Selection
22 Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.3-16. NEMA Freedom Line Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
23
E C N 22 2 1 A A F -
24 Design Modification Codes
N = Freedom NEMA (See PG03300001E)
2 = A200
25
Class Cover Control
01 = Non-reversing contactor—three-pole Type 1 non-combination
26 Non-reversing contactor—two-pole All others
Non-reversing contactor—four-pole E22 style combination
Non-reversing contactor—five-pole (Contact Eaton)
27 02 = Reversing contactor—three-pole Contactors
05 = Non-combination non-reversing starter 3 = Three-pole
06 = Non-combination reversing starter
28 07 = Non-combination non-reversing starter with CPT
Coil Voltage and/or Control Transformers
08 = Non-combination single-phase non-reversing starter
See Table 30.3-17 and Table 30.3-18
16 = Combination non-reversing starter—fusible disconnect
29 Combination non-reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings
fusible/non-fusible disconnect A = None G = 100 A/600 V R N = 600 A/600 V R
30 17 = Combination reversing starter—fusible disconnect
Combination reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect
B = 30 A/250 V R
C = 30 A/600 V R
H = 200 A/250 V R
J = 200 A/600 V R
P = 800 A/600 V L
Q = 1200 A/600 V L
18 = Combination reversing starter—fusible disconnect with CPT D = 60 A/250 V R K = 400 A/250 V R R = 1600 A/600 V L
Combination reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect E = 60 A/600 V R L = 400 A/600 V R S = 2000 A/600 V L
31 with CPT F = 100 A/250 V R M = 600 A/250 V R T = By description
22 = Combination non-reversing starter—circuit breaker HMCP/E or Breaker Ratings
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter—
32 circuit breaker
A = None
B =3A
H
J
= 150 A
= 250 A
R = 3000 A
T = By description
23 = Combination reversing starter—circuit breaker C =7A K = 400 A 5 =3A1
24 = Combination non-reversing starter—circuit breaker with CPT D = 15 A L = 600 A 6 =7A1
33 E = 30 A M = 800 A 7 = 15 A 1
F = 50 A N = 1000 A 8 = 30 A 1
NEMA Size W = 70 A P = 1200 A 9 = 50 A 1
G = 100 A Q = 2000 A I = 100 A 1
34 A = Size 00
0 = Size 0
3 = Size 3
4 = Size 4
7 = Size 7
8 = Size 8
1 = Size 1 5 = Size 5 9 = Size 9
2 = Size 2 6 = Size 6 Enclosure Type
35 1 = Type 1—General purpose
2 = Type 3R—Rainproof
3 = Type 4—Watertight (painted steel)
36 4 = Type 4X—Watertight (304-Grade stainless steel)
5 = Type 4X—Corrosion (nonmetallic)
6 = Type 7/9—Bolted hazardous location
7 = Type 7/9—Threaded hazardous location
37 8 = Type 12—Dust-tight
9 = Type 4X—316-Grade stainless steel
38 1 Use for Sizes 0–3, HMCP 600 V applications only.
Table 30.3-17. Magnetic Coil Codes (System Voltage) 2 Table 30.3-18. Control Power Transformer Codes (System Voltage)
39 Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil Code Primary Secondary
A 120/60 110/50 K 240/50 U 24/50 B 240/480–220/440 wired for 240 V 120/60–110/50

40 B
C
240/60 220/50
460/60 440/50
L
M
380/50
415/50
V
W
32/50
48/60
C
D
240/480–220/440 wired for 480 V
600/60–550/50
120/60–110/50
120/60–110/50
D 575/60 550/50 P 12 Vdc X 104–120/60 E 208/60 120/60
E 208/60 Q 24 Vdc Y 48/50 H 277/60 120/60
41 G
H
550/50
277/60
R
S
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
Z By description L 380/50 110/50
M 415/50 110/50
J 208–240/60 T 24/60 Q 208/60 24
42 2 When control power transformer modification codes (C1–C11)
are used or when starter class includes CPT (i.e., ECN07, 18) see
R
S
240/480–220/440 wired for 240 V
240/480–220/440 wired for 480 V
24
24
Table 30.3-18 for system voltage code. T 600/60 24
U 277/60 24
43 V 380/50 24
W 415/50 24
X 240/480/600 wired for 480 V 120
Y 240/480/600 wired for 480 V 24
Z By description

Sheet 30 031
Enclosed Box Selection Table 30.3-20. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Table 30.3-21. Type 1 Freedom
Table 30.3-19. Type 1 Freedom Contactors
Contactors Non-combination Starters 22
NEMA Size Box Shipping NEMA Size Box Shipping
NEMA Size Box Shipping (Poles) No. Weight No. Weight
(Poles) No. Weight
Lb (kg)
Lb (kg) Lb (kg) 23
Non-reversing Contactors— Non-reversing Starters—
Non-reversing Contactors— without Control Power Transformers without Control Power Transformers
without Control Power Transformers
00 5 14 (6.4) 00 1 7 (3.2) 24
00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4) 00 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 14 (6.4)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 7.3 (3.3) 0 1 7.1 (3.2)
1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15 (6.8)
with top adders
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15.5 (7.0)
0 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5) 25
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4) 1 1 7.9 (3.6)
3 (2P, 3P) 8 45 (20)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 7.3 (3.3) 1–2 with top adders/SSOL 3 11.5 (5.2)
with top adders 4 (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25) 2 2 8.5 (3.9) 26
0 (5P) 2 7.3 (3.3) 5 10 140 (64) 3 4 35 (16)
1 (2P, 3P) 1 7.9 (3.6) 6 F1E 385 (175) 4 4 47 (21)
1 (2P, 3P) 3 11 (5.0) 7 F1E 2 5 10 139 (63) 27
with top adders 8 F1E 2 6 F1E 360 (163)
1 (4P, 5P) 2 8.3 (3.8) 9 F1E 2 7 F1E 3
2 (2P, 3P, 4P 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9) Non-reversing Contactors— 8 F1E 3 28
3 (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16) with Control Power Transformers 9 F1E 3
4 (2P, 3P) 4 47 (21) 00 5 18 (8.2) Non-reversing Starters—
5 10 113 (51) 0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 18 (8.2)
with Control Power Transformers 29
00 3 15 (6.8)
6 F1E 325 (148) 1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19 (8.6)
0 3 15 (6.8)
7 F1E 1 2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19.5 (8.9)
1 3 16 (7.3) 30
8 F1E 1 3 (2P, 3P) 8 52 (24) 2 3 16.2 (7.4)
9 F1E 1 4 (2P, 3P) 8 63 (29) 3 4 42 (19)
Non-reversing Contactors— 5 10 147 (67) 4 4 54 (25) 31
with Control Power Transformers 6 F1E 405 (184) 5 10 146 (66)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4) 7 F1E 2 6 F1E 385 (175)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 3 15 (6.8) 8 F1E 2 7 F1E 3 32
with top adders 2 8 F1E 3
9 F1E
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12 (5.4) 9 F1E 3
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 3 15 (6.8)
Three-Pole Reversing Contactors—
with or without Control Power Transformers Reversing Starters— 33
with top adders without Control Power Transformers
00 6 18 (8.2)
1 (2P, 3P) 2 12.2 (5.5) 00 2 8 (3.6)
1 (2P, 3P) 3 12.5 (5.7)
0 6 18 (8.2)
0 2 8 (3.6) 34
with top adders 1 6 19 (8.6) 0 with top adders 3 11 (5)
1 (4P, 5P) 2 12.6 (5.7) 2 6 19 (8.6) 1 3 13 (5.9)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.8 (5.8) 3 8 47 (21) 1 with top adders 3 13.4 (6.1) 35
3 (2P, 3P) 4 40 (18) 4 9 69 (31) 2 3 15 (6.8)
5 10 170 (77) 3 4 43 (20)
4 (2P, 3P) 4 52 (24)
6 F1E 495 (225) 4 9 65 (30)
36
5 10 120 (54)
7 F1E 2 5 10 165 (75)
6 F1E 335 (152)
6 F1E 450 (204)
7 F1E 1 8 F1E 2
7 F1E 3
37
9 F2E 2
8 F1E 1
8 F2E 3
1 2 Consult factory.
9 F1E 9 F2E 3
Three-Pole Reversing Contactors— Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E. Reversing Starters—
38
without Control Power Transformers with Control Power Transformers
00 with top adders 3 15 (6.8)
00
0
2
2
7.8 (3.5)
8 (3.6) 0 3 15 (6.8)
39
1 3 11 (5.0) 1 with top adders 3 17 (7.7)
2 3 12 (5.4) 2
3
3
4
19 (8.6)
50 (23)
40
3 4 67 (30)
4 9 72 (33)
4 4 154 (70)
5 10 170 (77)
5
6
10 172 (78)
F1E 495 (225)
41
6 F1E 425 (193) 7 F1E 3
7 F1E 1
8 F1E 1
8 F2E 3 42
9 F2E 3
9 F2E 1 3 Consult factory.
1 Consult factory. 43


Sheet 30 032
Table 30.3-22. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Table 30.3-23. Type 1 Freedom Table 30.3-25. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
22 Non-combination Starters Combination Starters Combination Starters
NEMA Size / Box Shipping NEMA Size Box Shipping NEMA Size Box Shipping
IEC Frame No. Weight (Device) No. Weight (Device) No. Weight
23 Lb (kg) Lb (kg) Lb (kg)
Non-reversing Starters— Non-reversing — Non-reversing—
without Control Power Transformers with and without Control Power Transformers with and without Control Power Transformers
24 0 5 14.3 (6.5) 0 A 37 (17) 0 A 37 (17)
1 5 15.3 (6.9) 1 A 38 (17) 1 A 38 (17)
2 7 16 (7.3) 2 A 39 (18) 2 A 39 (18)
25 3 8 46 (21) 3 C 72 (33) 3 C 72 (33)
4 8 60 (27) 4 (HMCP) C 90 (41) 4 (HMCP) C 90 (41)
4 (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68)
26 5 10 150 (68) 4
5
(Disconnect switch) D
E
150 (68)
180 (82) 5 E 180 (82)
6 F1E 415 (188)
7 F1E 1 6 F1E 435 (197) 6 F1E 435 (197)
27 8 F1E 1 7 F2E 2 7 F2E 3
1 8 F2E 2 8 F2E 3
9 F1E
9 F2E 2 9 F2E 3
Non-reversing Starters—
28 with Control Power Transformers Reversing — Reversing—
0 6 18 (8.2) with and without Control Power Transformers with and without Control Power Transformers
1 6 19 (8.6) 0 B 42 (19) 0 B 42 (19)
29 2 6 20 (9) 1 B 43 (20) 1 B 43 (20)
3 8 53 (24) 2 B 44 (20) 2 B 44 (20)
30 4 8 67 (30) 3 C 84 (38) 3
4
C
D
84 (38)
173 (79)
5 10 157 (71) 4 D 173 (79)
6 F1E 1 5 F1E 2 5 E 550 (250)
31 7 F1E 1 6 F1E 550 (250) 6 F1E 3
1 7 F2E 2 7 F2E 3
8 F1E
1 8 F2E 2 8 F2E 3
9 F1E
32 Reversing Starters— 9 2 2 9 3 3
with or without Control Power Transformers Non-reversing—Oversized Non-reversing—Oversized

33 0
1
7
7
18.5 (8.4)
19.5 (8.9) 2
0–1–2 B 44 (20) 0–1–2
3
B 44 (20)
Consult factory. Consult factory.
2 7 21 (10)
34 3 8 48 (22) Table 30.3-24. Type 1 Freedom Non-reversing
4 9 72 (33) Combination Starters—Narrow Enclosure
5 10 175 (79) NEMA Size Box Shipping
35 6 F1E 525 (238)
No. Weight
Lb (kg)
7 F1E 1
NEMA 1 Enclosed
8 F2E 1
36 9 F2E 1
0–1–2 I 35 (16)
NEMA 12 Enclosed
1 Consult factory. 0–1–2 I 36 (16)
37 NEMA 12 Enclosed with Safety Door Interlock
0–1–2 I 37 (17)
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 033
C440 Series
C440 Series 22
Overview
Eaton’s C400 series of advanced motor protection offers innovative solutions with varying levels of capability. 23
From basic monitoring and protection to advanced motor management and efficiency calculations, the C400 series
has the exact solution to meet the needs of your application.
Table 30.3-26. C440 Series Comparison
24
Product
25
26
27
C440 C441 C445
Range 0.3–1500 A 1–540 A 0.3–800 A

28
Up to 690 Vac (50/60 Hz) Up to 600 Vac (50/60 Hz) Up to 690 Vac (20–80 Hz)
Up to 4160 Vac w/PTs
Features Selectable trip class (10 A, 10, 20, 30), ground Highly configurable line (voltage), load Full line, load and motor system coverage,
29
fault and phase imbalance protections (power) and motor (current) monitoring including advanced monitoring and
Flexible communication options for both and protection protection algorithms
monitoring and control Optional remote user interface allows USB connectivity (both inside and outside 30
user to configure and monitor without the control panel door) provide monitoring
opening a panel door and configuration with a PC
All-in-one design reduces inventory costs Multiple predefined operating modes with 31
by covering 1–540 A applications with only corresponding control station options
two SKU numbers Global modular design allows for
customization of system to match exact
customer needs
32
Benefits Extends the life of plant assets with Advanced diagnostics allow for quick and Voltage Loss Restart ability removes
selectable motor protection features accurate identification of the root source
of motor, pump or power quality faults
the need for users to manually restart
motors after momentary voltage dips by
33
Status LED provides added assurance
that valuable assets are protected by Configurable low-power trip capability automatically staggering restarts
indicating the overload operational status provides superior protection for smaller Multiple embedded fieldbus options
motors, slow speed motors and lightly allow integration into widest range of PLC 34
loaded large motors and DCS control systems without additional
modules or supply power
Motor efficiency, motor torque and 35
peak energy monitoring enhance users’
understanding of their application
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 034
C441 Motor Insight
Table 30.3-27. Features

22 Features C440 C441 C445 Features C440 C441 C445
Protection Monitoring
23 Thermal overload ■ ■ ■ Thermal capacity ■ ■ ■
Phase loss ■ ■ ■ Phase currents ■ ■ ■
Selectable trip class ■ ■ ■ Current unbalance ■ ■ ■
24 Ground fault ■ ■ ■ Ground fault current ■ ■ ■
Current unbalance — ■ ■ Frequency — ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
25 Voltage unbalance —
■ ■
Voltage unbalance —
■ ■
Phase reversal — Phase voltages —
Jam — ■ ■ Real power (kW) — ■ ■
26 Under/overpower trip — ■ ■ Under/overpower trip — ■ ■
Under/overvoltage trip — ■ ■ Under/overvoltage trip — ■ ■
Under/overcurrent trip — ■ ■ Under/overcurrent trip — ■ ■
27 Under/overfrequency — — ■ Motor start time/count — — ■
Stall — — ■ Motor efficiency — — ■
28 Instantaneous overcurrent — — ■ Motor torque — — ■
PTC (motor temperature) — — ■ Energy (kWh) — — ■
Energy deviations — — ■ Apparent power (kVA) — — ■
29 Voltage loss restart — — ■ Trip snapshot — — ■
Control Communications
30 Hard wire/local reset ■ ■ ■ Modbus® RTU ■ ■ ■
Network/electronic reset ■ ■ ■ PROFIBUS® ■ ■ ■
Programmable alarms — ■ ■ Modbus TCP ■ ■ ■
31 Programmable trips — ■ ■ EtherNet/IP ■ ■ ■
Multiple operation modes — — ■ DeviceNet™ ■ ■ Future
■ ■
32 Control user interface — — USB — —
Motor Control Center Availability
IEC—Power Xpert CX® ■ — ■
33 IEC—Power Xpert CXH™ ■ — ■
NEMAT—Freedom ■ ■ ■
NEMA—FlashGard® ■ ■ ■
34 ■ ■ ■
NEMA—Freedom ARC
NEMA—Aftermarket buckets ■ ■ ■
35
Note: Not all options are standard. Please consult factory.
36 Table 30.3-28. Supporting Documentation

Description Publication number
37 Motor Control and Protection Catalog CA08100006E
C441 User Manual MN04209001E
38 C445 User Manual MN042001EN
EIP-Assist Tag Generation Tool User Manual MN181001EN
FlashGard NEMA MCC Brochure BR04302001E
39 Power Xpert CX IEC MCC Brochure BR043003EN
Power Xpert CXH IEC MCC Brochure BR043008EN
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 035
C441 Motor Insight
C441 Motor Insight ■ One external remote reset terminal ■ Provides superior protection
■ Trip status indicator of motors and pumps before 22
catastrophic failure occurs
Motor Protection ■ Increases profitability with greater
■ Thermal overload process uptime and throughput, 23
■ Jam/stall protection reduced costs per repair, reduced
■ Current level alarming energy consumption and extended
equipment life 24
■ Current imbalance
■ Adjustments to overload configura-
■ Current phase loss
tion can be made at any time
■ Ground fault 25
■ Phase reversal Safety
■ IP 20 rated terminal blocks
Load Protection
■ Terminal blocks are set back
26
C441 Motor Insight Overload
and Monitoring Relay ■ Undercurrent from the display to reduce
■ Low power (kW) operator shock hazard 27
General Description ■ High power (kW) ■ Remote display (optional) does
Eaton’s C441 Motor Insight®, the not require that the operator open
Line Protection the panel to configure the device 28
first product in the intelligent power
control solutions family, is a highly ■ Overvoltage
configurable motor, load and line ■ Undervoltage
Flexibility
protection device with power monitor- ■ Voltage imbalance
■ Communications modules 29
ing, diagnostics and flexible communi- ❑ Offered in a variety of
■ Voltage phase loss
cations, allowing the customer to save configurations
energy, optimize their maintenance Monitoring Capabilities ❑ External snap-on modules
30
schedules and configure greater ■ Current—average and phase rms provide support for multiple
system protection, thus reducing communications protocols
■ Voltage—average and phase rms
overall costs and downtime. 31
■ Power—motor kW ■ Advanced power, voltage and
C441 Motor Insight is available in ■ Power factor current monitoring capabilities
either a line-powered or 120 Vac
■ Frequency ■ Communications modules 32
control powered design, capable of and remote display can be
monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac. ■ Thermal capacity
used simultaneously
Each of these units is available in ■ Run hours 33
■ Highly configurable fault and
a 1–9 A or a 5–90 A FLA model. With ■ Ground fault current reset characteristics for numerous
external CTs, C441 Motor Insight ■ Current imbalance % applications
can protect motors up to 540 A FLA.
■ Voltage imbalance % ■ Fully programmable isolated
34
Available add-on accessories
include communication modules ■ Motor starts fault and auxiliary relays
for Modbus®, DeviceNet™ and ■ Motor run hours Ease of Use 35
PROFIBUS®, all with I/O options.
Options ■ Bright LED display with easy-to-
For ease-of-use and operator
understand setting and references
safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a ■ Type 1, 12 remote display
■ Powered from line voltage or
36
remote display that mounts easily ■ Type 3R remote display kit
with two 30 mm knockouts. 120 Vac control power
■ Communication modules
❑ Modbus
■ Remote display powered from 37
Features base unit
❑ Modbus with I/O
■ Full word descriptions and units
Size/Range ❑ DeviceNet with I/O on user interface 38
■ Broad FLA range of 1–540 A ❑ PROFIBUS with I/O
■ Selectable trip class (5–30)
❑ Modbus TCP with I/O
Standards and Certifications
■ Four operating voltage options ■ cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508
39
(contact product line)
❑ Line-powered from 240 Vac, ❑ EtherNet/IP with I/O ■ UL 1053 applicable sections for
480 Vac, 600 Vac (contact product line) ground fault detection 40
❑ Control-powered from 120 Vac ■ CSA certified (Class 3211-02)
Benefits ■ CE
Motor Control
■ NEMA
41
■ Two output relays Reliability and Improved Uptime
■ IEC EN 60947-4-1
❑ One B300 Form C fault relay and ■ Advanced diagnostics allows for
one B300 ground fault shunt relay quick and accurate identification ■ RoHS 42
❑ Other relay configurations are of the root source of a motor, pump
available, including one Form A or power quality fault; reducing
and one Form B SPST (fault troubleshooting time and the loss of 43
and auxiliary relays) allowing productivity, reducing repeat faults
programmable isolated relay due to misdiagnosis, and increasing
behavior and unique voltages process output and profitability

Sheet 30 036
C441 Motor Insight
Product Selection Accessories

22 Table 30.3-29. C441 Motor Insight Table 30.3-31. Communication Modules
Power Monitoring Current Catalog Description I/O Catalog
23 Source Range Range Number Number
240 Vac (170–264) 170–264 Vac 1–9 A C441BA

Modbus
5–90 A C441BB Modbus communication module None C441M
24 480 Vac (323–528) 323–528 Vac 1–9 A C441CA Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N
5–90 A C441CB 24 Vdc C441P
600 Vac (489–660) 489–660 Vac 1–9 A C441DA
25 5–90 A C441DB
DeviceNet
DeviceNet communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441K
120 Vac (93.5–132) 170–660 Vac 1–9 A C4410109NOUI
5–90 A C4410590NOUI 24 Vdc C441L
26 PROFIBUS
Table 30.3-30. C441 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S
Catalog Motor No. of No. of CT External
27 Number 1 FLA Loops Conductors Multiplier CT Kit
24 Vdc C441Q
Through Setting Catalog

EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
CT Primary Number 2 Ethernet-based communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441R
28 Current Range: 5–90 A 24 Vdc C441T
C441_B and 5–22.5 A 3 4 4 —
C4410590NOUI 6.67–30 A 2 3 3 — Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside
29 10–45 A 1 2 2 — C441 Motor Insight offers several accessories for the
20–90 A 0 1 1 — customer’s ease of use and safety:
Current Range: 1–9 A
30 C441_A and 1–5 A 1 2 2 —
■ Types 1 and 12 remote display
C4410109NOUI 2–9 A 0 1 1 — ■ Type 3R remote display kit
■ Mounting plate adapter
31 60–135 A 0
120–270 A 0
1
1
150–(150:5) C441CTKIT150
300– C441CTKIT300
240–540 A 0 1 (300:5) C441CTKIT600 Features and Benefits
600– ■ Remote display unit:
32 (600:5)
❑ Same user interface as the overload relay
1 Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required.
Operating Voltage Codes: ❑ Enhanced operator safety—operator can configure
33 Code Voltage
the overload without opening the enclosure door
■ Type 3R kit mounts with standard 30 mm holes
B 240 Vac
■ Mounting plate for retrofit in existing installations
34 C 480 Vac
D 600 Vac Table 30.3-32. Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside
<empty> 120 Vac control power Description Catalog
35 2 Number
Any manufacturer’s CTs may be used.
Remote display Types 1 and 12 (UL 508) C4411
36 Type 3R kit for remote display (UL 508)
Conversion plate
C4413
C441CMP1
37 Communication Cables
The remote display requires a communication cable
to connect to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay:
38 Table 30.3-33. Communication Cable Lengths
Length in Inches (meters) Catalog
39 Number
9.8 (0.25) D77E-QPIP25

39.4 (1.0) D77E-QPIP100
40 78.7 (2.0) D77E-QPIP200
118.1 (3.0) D77E-QPIP300
41 Table 30.3-34. Current Transformer Kits

Description Catalog
Number
42
Three 150:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight C441CTKIT150
43
For more information about technical data and
specifications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5—
Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.

Sheet 30 037
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay
C440/XT Electronic Size/Range Flexibility

22
■ Broad FLA range (0.33–1500 A) ■ Available with NEMA, IEC and
Overload Relay DP contactors
■ Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
■ Improves return on investment by
■ Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
reducing inventory carrying costs
23
DP contactors
■ Most compact electronic overload in
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and
its class selectable trip class 24
■ Design incorporates built-in ground
Motor Control fault protection, thus eliminating the
■ Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault need for separate CTs and modules 25
(NC) contacts ■ Flexible communication with
■ Test/Trip button optional I/O enables easy integration
into plant management systems for 26
Motor Protection remote monitoring and control
■ Thermal overload ■ Available as an open component
■ Phase loss and in enclosed control and motor 27
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay control center assemblies
■ Selectable (ON/OFF)
phase imbalance
General Description Monitoring Capabilities 28
■ Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
Eaton’s electronic overload relay (EOL) ■ Individual phase currents rms
is the most compact, high-featured, User Interface ■ Average three-phase current rms
economical product in its class. ■ Large FLA selection dial ■ Thermal memory
29
Designed on a global platform, the
■ Trip status indicator ■ Fault indication (overload, phase
new EOL covers the entire power
control spectrum, including NEMA, ■ Operating mode LED loss, phase imbalance, ground fault) 30
IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA ■ DIP switch selectable trip class, Safety
and DP versions are offered with phase imbalance and ground fault
the C440 designation while the IEC ■ Selectable Auto/Manual reset
■ IP 20 rated terminal blocks 31
■ Available in Eaton’s industry-leading
offering has the XT designation. The
electronic design provides reliable, Feature Options FlashGard MCCs
accurate and value-driven protection ■ Remote reset ■ Tested to the highest industry 32
and communications capabilities in a ❑ 120 Vac
standards, such as UL, CSA,
single compact device. It is the flexible CE and IEC
choice for any application requiring ❑ 24 Vac
■ RoHS compliant
33
easy-to-use, reliable protection. ❑ 24 Vdc
Eaton has a long history of innovations ■ Tamper-proof cover Standards and Certifications 34
and product development in motor ■ Communications modules ■ UL
control and protection, including both ❑ Modbus RTU RS-485 ■ CSA
traditional NEMA, as well as IEC con- ❑ DeviceNet with I/O ■ CE 35
trol. It was from this experience that
❑ PROFIBUS with I/O ■ NEMA
the C440 was developed, delivering
new solutions to meet today’s ❑ Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010) ■ IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 36
demands. ❑ EtherNet/IP (planned) ■ ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
■ RoHS
C440 is a self-powered electronic ❑ Smartwire (planned)
■ ATEX directive 94/9/EC
37
overload relay available up to 100 A
as a self-contained unit. With external Benefits ■ Equipment Group 2, Category 2
CTs, C440 can protect motor up
Reliability and Improved Uptime
38
to 1500 FLA. Available add-on
accessories include remote reset ■ C440 provides the users with peace
capability and communication of mind knowing that their assets 39
modules with I/O for DeviceNet, are protected with the highest level
PROFIBUS and Modbus. of motor protection and communi-
cation capability in its class 40
Features ■ Extends the life of plant assets
■ Reliable, accurate, electronic with selectable motor protection
motor protection features such as trip class, phase 41
■ Easy to select, install and maintain imbalance and ground fault
■ Protects against unnecessary
■ Compact size
downtime by discovering changes 42
■ Flexible, intelligent design in your system (line/load) with
■ Global product offering— remote monitoring capabilities
available with NEMA, IEC and ■ Status LED provides added
43
DP power control assurance that valuable assets
are protected by indicating the
overload operational status

Sheet 30 038
Product Selection
22 Table 30.3-35. XT Electronic Overload Relays
For Use with For Use with Overload Contact Frame Auxiliary Contact Type Catalog
23 XT Contactor Frame Contactor Range (Amps) Sequence Size Configuration Number
For Direct Mount to XT Contactors
B XTCE007B…, 0.33–1.65 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65 XTOE1P6BCS
24 XTCE009B…, 1–5 ZEB12-5 XTOE005BCS
XTCE012B…,
XTCE015B… 4–20 ZEB12-20 XTOE020BCS
2 4 6 98 96
25 C XTCE018C…, 0.33–1.65 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1,65 XTOE1P6CCS
XTCE025C…, 1–5 ZEB32-5 XTOE005CCS
XTCE032C
4–20 ZEB32-20 XTOE020CCS
26 9–45
2 4 6 98 96
ZEB32-45 XTOE045CCS
D XTCE040D…, 9–45 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45 XTOE045DCS
27 XTCE050D…,
XTCE065D…,
20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100 XTOE100DCS
XTCE072D… 2 4 6 98 96
28 F, G XTCE080F…,
XTCE095F…,
20–100 97 95 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS
XTCE115G…,
XTCE150G…,
29 XTCE170G…
2 4 6 98 96
With Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors
30 B XTCE007B…,
XTCE009B…,
0.33–1.65 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1.65-GF XTOE1P6BGS
1–5 ZEB12-5-GF XTOE005BGS
XTCE012B…,
XTCE015B… 4–20 ZEB12-20-GF XTOE020BGS
2 4 6 98 96
31 C XTCE018C…, 0.33–1.65 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1.65-GF XTOE1P6CGS
XTCE025C…, 1–5 ZEB32-5-GF XTOE005CGS
XTCE032C
32 4–20
2 4 6 98 96
ZEB32-20-GF XTOE020CGS
9–45 ZEB32-45-GF XTOE045CGS
D XTCE040D…, 9–45 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45-GF XTOE045DGS
33 XTCE050D…, 20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100-GF XTOE100DGS
XTCE065D…,
XTCE072D… 2 4 6 98 96
34 F, G XTCE080F…, 20–100 97 95 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS
XTCE095F…,
XTCE115G…,
35 XTCE150G…,
XTCE170G…
2 4 6 98 96
Table 30.3-36. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Use with Large Frame XT Contactors (L–R)
36 Use CTs and 1–5 A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
XT For Use with CT Range Description CT Kit Terminal Overload
Contactor IEC Contactor (Ampere) Catalog Size Relay
37 Frame Ampere Range Number Catalog
(AC-3) Number
38 L, M 185–500 60–300 300: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated lugs
ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
XTOE005CCSS
3/0 Cu/Al
39 M, N 300–820 120–600 600: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,
ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS
pass-through holes
N 580–1000 200–1000 1000: 5 panel-mount ZEB-XCT1000 (3) 750 kcmil XTOE005CCSS
40 CT kit with integrated, 3/0 Cu/Al
pass-through holes
R 1600 300–1500 1500: 5 panel-mount ZEB-XCT1500 (4) 750 kcmil XTOE005CCSS
41 CT kit with integrated, 1/0 Cu/Al
pass-through holes
42
43

Sheet 30 039
Table 30.3-37. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Overload Frame Contact Type Overload Relay Overload Relay with Ground 22
Range (Amps) Size Sequence Catalog Number Fault Catalog Number
Overload Relay
0.33–1.65 45 mm ZEB32-1.65/KK XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE1P6CGSS
23
1 3 5 97 95
1–5 ZEB32-5/KK XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
4–20
2 4 6 98 96
ZEB32-20/KK XTOE020CCSS XTOE020CGSS 24
9–45 ZEB32-45/KK XTOE045CCSS XTOE045CGSS
20–100 55 mm ZEB150-100/KK XTOE100GCSS XTOE100GGSS
25
Table 30.3-38. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to Freedom Series Contactors
For Use with Freedom For Use with Overload Standard Feature Set Standard Feature Set with
NEMA Contactor Size Contactor 1 Range (Amps) Catalog Number Ground Fault Catalog Number 26
00 CN15AN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF00 C440A2A1P6SF00
1–5 C440A1A005SF00 C440A2A005SF00 27
4–20 C440A1A020SF00 C440A2A020SF00
0 CN15BN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF0 C440A2A1P6SF0
1–5 C440A1A005SF0 C440A2A005SF0
28
4–20 C440A1A020SF0 C440A2A020SF0
1 CN15DN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF1 C440A2A1P6SF1 29
1–5 C440A1A005SF1 C440A2A005SF1
4–20 C440A1A020SF1 C440A2A020SF1
9–45 C440A1A045SF1 C440A2A045SF1
30
2 CN15GN3_B 1–5 C440A1A005SF2 C440A2A005SF2
4–20 C440A1A020SF2 C440A2A020SF2 31
9–45 C440A1A045SF2 C440A2A045SF2
3 CN15KN3_ 20–100 C440B1A100SF3 C440B2A100SF3
1 CN15 contactor listed is non-reversing with a 120 Vac coil. For more options, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, 32
Tab 33, Section 33.1.
Table 30.3-39. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Use with NEMA Contactors Sizes 4–8 33
Use CTs and 1–5 A C440 overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
For Use with NEMA CT Range Description CT Kit Terminal Overload Relay
Contactor Size (Ampere) Catalog Number Size Catalog Number 34
4 and 5 60–300 300: 5 panel-mount ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil C440A1A005SAX
CT kit with integrated, (2) 250 kcmil
pass-through holes 3/0 Cu/Al 35
6 120–600 600: 5 panel-mount ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil C440A1A005SAX
CT kit with integrated, 3/0 Cu/Al
pass-through holes 36
Table 30.3-40. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount
Overload Frame Overload Relay Overload Relay with 39
Range Size Catalog Number Ground Fault Catalog Number
0.33–1.65 45 mm C440A1A1P6SAX C440A2A1P6SAX

40
1–5 C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX
4–20 C440A1A020SAX C440A2A020SAX
9–45 C440A1A045SAX C440A2A045SAX 41
20–100 55 mm C440B1A100SAX C440B2A100SAX
42
43

Sheet 30 040
Table 30.3-41. Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing

22 NEMA Continuous Service Limit Maximum UL Horsepower Three-Pole Three-Pole
Size Ampere Current Rating Single-Phase Three-Phase Non-Reversing 12 Reversing 12
Rating (Amps) Catalog Number Catalog Number
23 115 V 230 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V
C440 Electronic Overload Relays
00 9 11 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 AN19AN0_ 5E _ AN59AN0_ 5E _
24 0 18 21 1 2 3 3 5 5 AN19BN0_ 5E _ AN59BN0_ 5E _
1 27 32 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 AN19DN0_ 5E _ AN59DN0_ 5E _
2 45 52 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 AN19GN0_ 5E _ AN59GN0_ 5E _
25 3 90 104 — — 25 30 50 50 AN19KN0_ 5E _ AN59KN0_ 5E _
43 135 156 — — 40 50 100 100 3 3
54 270 311 — — 75 100 200 200 AN19SN0_ 5E _ AN59SN0_ 5E _
26 C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays
00 9 11 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 AN19AN0_ 5G _ AN59AN0_ 5G _
0 18 21 1 2 3 3 5 5 AN19BN0_ 5G _ AN59BN0_ 5G _
27 1 27 32 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 AN19DN0_ 5G _ AN59DN0_ 5G _
2 45 52 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 AN19GN0_ 5G _ AN59GN0_ 5G _
3 90 104 — — 25 30 50 50 AN19KN0_ 5G _ AN59KN0_ 5G _
28 43 135 156 — — 40 50 100 100 3 3
54 270 311 — — 75 100 200 200 AN19SN0_ 5G _ AN59SN0_ 5G _
1 Underscore (_) indicates coils suffix required, see Coil Suffix table below.
29 2 Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table below.
3 Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 1–5 A C440
overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
30 4 NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60–300 A panel-mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 1–5 A C440 overload relay
(C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
31 Table 30.3-42. Coil Suffix Codes Table 30.3-43. C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only)
Suffix Coil Volts and Hertz NEMA Size OLR Code FLA Range OLR Code FLA Rating
A 120/60 or 110/50 00 1P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A

32 B 240/60 or 220/50 005 1.0–5.0 A — —
C 480/60 or 440/50
0 1P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A
D 600/60 or 550/50
33 E 208/60 005 1.0–5.0 A — —
H 277/60 1 1P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A
J 208–240/60 005 1.0–5.0 A 045 9.0–45 A
34 K 240/50
2 005 1.0–5.0 A 045 9.0–45 A
L 380–415/50
020 4.0–20 A — —
N 550/50
35 T
U
24/60, 24/50 3 100 20–100 A — —
24/50 45 300 — — 60–300 A
V 32/50 55 300 60–300 A — —
36 W
Y
48/60
48/50
5 Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4
contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300)
and 1–5 A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or
37 C440A2A005SELAX).
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 041
Accessories Communication Advanced Communication—

Table 30.3-44. CT Kits The C440 is provided with two levels of Monitoring and Control 22
communication capability. C440 also has the ability to communi-
Description Catalog
cate on industrial protocols such as
Number Basic Communication via Expansion DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU 23
Safety Cover Module—Monitoring Only and Modbus TCP, and Ethernet
Clear Lexan® cover that mounts ZEB-XSC Basic communication on the C440 (planned) while providing control
on top of the FLA dial and is accomplished using an expansion capability using I/O. 24
DIP switches when closed
module. The expansion module
Reset Bar plugs into the expansion bay on An expansion module (mentioned
Assembles to the top of the ZEB-XRB the C440 overload relay, enabling earlier) combined with a communica- 25
overload to provide a larger communications with the overload via tion adapter and a communication
target area for door-mounted module allows easy integration onto
their Modbus RTU (RS-485) network.
reset operators
No additional parts are required. the customer’s network. 26
Remote Reset
Remote reset module C440-XCOM
Advanced Communication—
(24 Vdc) 1 Communication Module 27
Remote reset module ZEB-XRR-120 The communication adapter comes
(120 Vac) 1 standard with four inputs and two
Remote reset module ZEB-XRR-24 outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while 28
(24 Vac) 1 providing the customer with flexible
1 Customer can wire remote-mounted button mounting options (DIN rail or panel).
to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton, 29
catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10). For more information about technical
data and specifications as well as
dimensions, see Volume 5—Motor 30
Basic Communication—Modbus Control and Protection, CA08100006E,
Section 31.
31
32
33
34
Advanced Communication—
Communication Adapter
with Communication Module 35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 042
XT IEC Power Control
22 XT IEC Power Control
23
24
25
26
27
28 Product Overview Contactors and Starters Features and Benefits

The XT line of IEC power control offers ■ AC control from 12 V to 600 V
29 Product Description
starting and protection solutions ideal 50/60 Hz
for control panels. The Eaton XT contactors and starters ■ DC control from 12 V to 220 V
includes non-reversing and reversing
■ Available with screw or spring
30 Innovations in the design and develop- contactors, overload relays and a
cage terminals
ment allow users to reduce material variety of related accessories. Because
costs, reduce installation effort, and XT meets IEC, UL®, CSA® and CE ■ Reversing or non-reversing
31 enhance panel safety and performance standards, it is the perfect product contactors and starters
all in a compact design. Some of these solution for IEC applications all over ■ AC-3 contactor ratings to 1000 A and
key innovations include: the world. The compact, space AC-1 contactor ratings to 2000 A
32 ■ Toolless assembly of manual motor
saving and easy to install XT line of IEC ■ Non-reversing starters to 650 A
contactors and starters is the efficient
controllers and reversing contactors ■ Panel or DIN rail mounting to 65 A
and effective solution for customer
33 ■ Low coil consumption applications from 7 A to 2450 A. ■ IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof
■ Front accessibility to coil terminations ■ Large ambient temperature range,
■ Built-in surge suppression on Application Description –25 to 50 °C (–13 to 122 °F)
34 electronic coils The XT line of IEC power control was ■ AC and DC controlled contactors in
■ Built-in auxiliary contact for engineered to provide highly effective the same compact frame
contactors up to 32 A in a control and protection for a variety of ■ Low power consumption AC and
35 45 mm frame loads, including motors, compressors, DC coils
■ Finger-safe and back-of-hand pumps, resistive, capacitor banks, ■ Built-in NO or NC auxiliary contacts
36 proof ratings isolation, and others. XT also includes to 32 A
■ Direct PLC control on 185–2000 A IEC ratings for lighting applications ■ Plug-in accessories for reduced
contactors as well. installation time
37 The XT line includes a large offering XT contactors can be used in safety ■ Coil replacement on Frames C–N
of power control components and applications according to EN 954-1, (18–820 A)
accessories that cover a broad range EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061 up to ■ Contact replacement on Frames D–N
38 of applications and ratings: Category 4, Pl e and SIL 3. Information (40 –820 A)
concerning safety-related characteris- ■ Integrated suppressor 7–150 A DC
■ Three-pole contactors to 2000 A tics (B10 and B10d values) is available
39 operated contactors and 185–2000 A
■ Four-pole contactors to 200 A online. The auxiliary contact modules AC and DC operated contactors
■ Capacitor contactors to 680 kvar and built-in auxiliary contacts meet
IEC EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively
40 ■ Mini contactors to 9 A driven) and IEC EN 60947-4-1 Annex F Standards and Certifications
■ Relays to 16 A (mirror contacts).
■ Thermal overload relays to 630 A ■ IEC EN 60947
41 ■ Electronic overload relays to 1500 A ■ CE approved
■ Manual motor protectors to 65 A ■ UL
42 ■ Manual motor controllers and ■ CSA
combination motor controllers ■ ATEX
to 65 A ■ RoHS
43

Sheet 30 043
Technical Data 22
Table 30.3-45. XT Coil Data
XT Motor Max. P.U. (x Uc) P.U. Sealed Maximum P.U. D.O.
Frame Voltage hp AC DC VA Watts Watts VA Watts Watts Operation Time ms Time ms 23
Rating (DC) (DC) Rate
Operations/
Hour 24
B 200 5 0.8–1.1 0.8–1.1 30 23 4.5 4.4 1.4 4.5 9000 21 18
230 5
460 10 25
575 10
C 200 10 0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 67 50 12.0 9 2.6 0.5 5000 22 14
230 10 26
460 20
575 25
D 200 20 0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 178 117 24.0 19 5.3 0.5 5000 18 13 27
230 25
460 50
575 60 28
F 200 25 0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 345 190 90.0 30 7.1 1.3 3600 20 14
230 40
460 75 29
575 100
G 200 40 0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 170 130 149.0 3.1 2.1 2.1 3600 33 41
230 60 30
460 125
575 125
H 200 60 0.8–1.15 0.8–1.15 210 180 180 2.6 2.1 2.1 3000 60 40 31
230 75
460 150
575 200
32
L 200 100 0.7–1.15 07–1.15 250 200 200 4.3 3.3 3.3 3000 100 80
230 125 380 250 250 80 110
460
575
250
300
(300 A) (300 A) (300 A) (300 A) (300 A)
33
M 200 150 0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 450 350 350 4.3 3.3 3.3 2000 80 80
230
460
200
400
34
575 500
N 200
230
350
420
0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 800 700 700 7.5 6.5 6.5 1000 70 70 35
460 850
575 980
R 200 560 0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 1600 1400 1400 15.0 13.0 13.0 1000 70 40
36
230 640
460 1200
575 1300 37
Integrated suppressor Table 30.3-46. Coil Data Notes
38
7–150 A DC operated contactors contactor and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc
and 185–2000 A AC and DC operated P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken magnet coil. Coil data has a ±5%
contactors. from closing of the coil circuit to main range depending on the application, 39
contact touch.
therefore, specific data may vary.
D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken
from opening of the coil circuit to main 40
contact separation.
Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
41
42
43

Sheet 30 044
Table 30.3-47. Specifications

22 Frame R N M L H G F D C B
Catalog Number Series XTCE1600 XTCE750 XTCE500 XTCE300A XTCE225A XTCE150 XTCE095 XTCE072 XTCE032 XTCE015
23 Electrical Data
AC-3 at 400 V (A) 1600 750 500 300 225 150 95 72 32 15.5
Electrical Life 300,000 1,400,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 1,300,000 1,300,000 750,000 1,300,000 800,000
24 Maximum Operating Freq. 380 500 850 850 1000 800 800 800 800 1000
AC-3 (Ops./h)
AC-1 at 40 °C (A) 2200 1102 857 490 386 190 130 98 45 22
25 Max. Nominal Power 1200 600 400 250 150 125 75 40 20 10
460 V (hp)
General
26 Mechanical Life 5,000,000 5,000,000 7,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
Width (mm) 515 250 160 140 140 90 90 55 45 45
27 Height (mm) 392 296 200 200 164 170 170 115 85 68
Depth (mm) 252 232 216 216 208 150 150 132.1 97 75
Weight (kg) 32 15 8 8 6.5 2 2 0.9 0.42 0.23
28 Min. Ambient –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25
Temperature (°C)
Max. Ambient 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
29 Temperature (°C)
Contacts
30 Wire Range
Solid or Stranded (AWG)
2/0–500
kcmil
2/0–500
kcmil
1/0–250
kcmil
2/0–500
kcmil
1/0–350
kcmil
8–3/0 8–3/0 14–1 14–8 18–14
Power Terminal Torque 311 (35) 213 (24) 213 (24) 213 (24) 213 (24) 123.9 (14) 123.9 (14) 29.2 (3.3) 26.6 (3) 10.6 (1.2)
31 Lb/In (Nm)
Control Circuit 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14
Control Terminal Torque 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2)
32 Auxiliary Contacts
Number of Auxiliary Contact 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 1 1
Modules in Basic Unit
33 Number of Additional 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 6 4 4
Auxiliary Contact Modules
Ie AC-15/230 V (A) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4
34 Mounting Method
Dimensions of Drilled Hole 430 165 130 130 120 70 70 45 35 35
35 Width A (mm])
Dimensions of Drilled Hole 270 215 180 180 160 156 156 105 75 60
Height B (mm)
36 Mounting Screws 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 2xM4 2xM4 2xM4
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 045
Thermal Overload Relays
Thermal Overload Relays Tripping Characteristics

22
These tripping characteristics are the 2h
100 XTOB...HC1,
mean values of the spread at 20 °C XTOB...LC1
ambient temperature in a cold state. 60
40 23
Minutes
Tripping time depends on response 20
current. With devices at operating
temperature, the tripping time
10
6
24
of the overload relay reduces to 4
approximately 25% of the read off
value. Specific characteristics for
2
25
1
each individual setting range can be 40
found in MN03402001E. 3-Phase
20 26
XTOB, XTOT Overload Relays
Seconds
10
6
Product Description 2h 4 27
100 XTOB...BC1, 2-Phase
The XT line of IEC motor thermal 60 XTOB...CC1, 2
overload relays provides an efficient 40 XTOB...DC1 1
motor protection solution, available 28
Minutes
20 0.6
up to 630 A. XTOB units can be 10
1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20
directly mounted to the contactor x Setting Current
or mounted separately.
6
4
29
2 Figure 30.3-13. XTOB...HC1, XTOB...LC1
Features and Benefits
■ Direct connect up to 250 A
1
40
30
3-Phase
■ Stand alone and CT type up to 630 A 20
31
Seconds
■ Large thermal overcurrent range 10

■ Test button 6
4
■ Manual/automatic selectable reset 2-Phase
2 32
■ NO-NC auxiliary as standard
1
■ Class 10A (to 250 A) 0.6
■ Class 30 (CT type) 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 33
x Setting Current
34
■ IEC EN 60947 Figure 30.3-11. XTOB...BC1, XTOB...CC1,
■ CE approved XTOB...DC1
■ UL 35
■ CSA 2h
■ ATEX 100 XTOB...GC1
60 36
■ RoHS 40
Minutes
Note: Short-circuit protection: Observe 20

the maximum permissible fuse of the 10
37
contactor with direct device mounting. 6
See MN03402001E for more information 4
on overload relays for Frames B–G. 2 38
Trip Class: 10A
Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors. 1
40
EC prototype test certificate available
upon request. See manuals MN03402001E 20
3-Phase 39
and MN03407001E.
Seconds
10
Instructional Leaflets
6 40
4
2-Phase
■ Pub51221: XTOB, D Frame overload 2
relays (inside of packaging) 1 41
■ Pub51222: XTOB, B–C Frame over- 0.6
load relays (inside of packaging) 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20
x Setting Current 42
Figure 30.3-12. XTOB...GC1
43

Sheet 30 046
Technical Data
22 Table 30.3-48. Direct Mount to XT Contactors—For Use with XT Contactor Frame
Frame Overload Contact Contact For Use with Fuse Type 1 Type 2 Maximum CEC/ Catalog
23 Releases, Ir Sequence Configuration Contactor
Ampere Range
Coordination,
gG/gL
Coordination,
gG/gL
Circuit
Breaker
NEC
Fuse
Number
B 0.1–0.16 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 0.5 25 3 XTOBP16BC1

24 0.16–0.24
97 95
1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 1 25 3 XTOBP24BC1
0.24–0.4 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 2 25 3 XTOBP40BC1
0.4–0.6 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 4 25 3 XTOBP60BC1
2 4 6 98 96A214/
25 0.6–1 22 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 4 25 3 XTOB001BC1
1–1.6 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 6 25 6 XTOB1P6BC1
1.6–2.4 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 10 25 6 XTOB2P4BC1
26 2.4–4 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 16 25 15 XTOB004BC1
4–6 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 25 20 25 20 XTOB006BC1
6–10 1NO-1NC 7–15 A 50 25 25 35 XTOB010BC1
27 9–12
12–16
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
9–15 A
12–15 A
50
50
25
25
25
30
45
45
XTOB012BC1
XTOB016BC1
C 0.1–0.16 97 95 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 25 0.5 25 3 XTOBP16CC1
28 0.16–0.24
0.24–0.4
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
18–32 A
18–32 A
25
25
1
2
25
25
3
3
XTOBP24CC1
XTOBP40CC1
0.4–0.6 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 25 4 25 3 XTOBP60CC1
2 4 6 98 9614/
22
29 0.6–1
1–1.6
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
18–32 A
18–32 A
25
25
4
6
25
25
3
6
XTOB001CC1
XTOB1P6CC1
1.6–2.4 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 25 10 25 6 XTOB2P4CC1
2.4–4 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 25 16 25 15 XTOB004CC1
30 4–6 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 25 20 25 20 XTOB006CC1
6–10 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 50 25 25 25 XTOB010CC1
10–16 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 63 35 30 25 XTOB016CC1
31 16–24 1NO-1NC 18–32 A 100 35 30 25 XTOB024CC1
24–32 1NO-1NC 25–32 A 125 63 30 25 XTOB032CC1
D 6–10 1NO-1NC 40–72 A 50 25 25 25 XTOB010DC1
32 10–16
97 95
1NO-1NC 40–72 A 63 35 25 25 XTOB016DC1
16–24 1NO-1NC 40–72 A 63 50 30 25 XTOB024DC1
24–40 1NO-1NC 40–72 A 125 63 125 125 XTOB040DC1
2 4 6 98 96
33 40–57 1NO-1NC 50–72 A 160 80 150 150 XTOB057DC1
50–65 1NO-1NC 65–72 A 160 100 150 200 XTOB065DC1
65–75 1NO-1NC 72 A 200 125 150 200 XTOB075DC1
34 F–G 25–35 97 95 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 125 100 125 125 XTOB035GC1
35–50 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 160 125 150 200 XTOB050GC1
50–70 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 250 160 150 200 XTOB070GC1
35 70–100
2 4 6 98 96
1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 200 400 400 XTOB100GC1
95–125 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 200 500 400 XTOB125GC1
120–150 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 200 600 600 XTOB150GC1
36 145–175 1NO-1NC 150–170 A 315 200 600 600 XTOB175GC1
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 047
Table 30.3-49. Separate Mount to XT Contactors—For Use with XT Contactor Frame

Frame Overload Contact Contact For Use with Fuse Type 1 Type 2 Maximum CEC/ Catalog 22
Releases, Ir Sequence Configuration Contactor Coordination, Coordination, Circuit NEC Number
Ampere Range gG/gL gG/gL Breaker Fuse
F–G 25–35 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 125 100 125 125 XTOB035GC1S

23
97 95
35–50 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 160 125 150 200 XTOB050GC1S
50–70 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 250 160 150 200 XTOB070GC1S
70–100
2 4 6 98 96
1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 200 400 400 XTOB100GC1S 24
95–125 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 250 500 400 XTOB125GC1S
120–150 1NO-1NC 80–170 A 315 250 600 600 XTOB150GC1S
145–175 1NO-1NC 150–170 A 315 250 600 600 XTOB175GC1S 25
H 50–70 1 2 5 97 95 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 250 160 150 200 XTOB070HC1
70–100 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 315 200 400 400 XTOB100HC1
95–125 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 315 250 500 400 XTOB125HC1 26
120–160 2 4 6 98 96 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 400 250 600 600 XTOB160HC1
160–220 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 400 1 315 1 600 800 XTOB220HC1
200–250 1NO-1NC 225–250 A 400 1 315 1 600 700 XTOB250HC1 27
L 50–70 1 2 5 97 95 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 250 160 150 200 XTOB070LC1
7 0–100 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 315 200 400 400 XTOB100LC1
95–125 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 315 250 500 400 XTOB125LC1 28
120–160 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 400 250 600 600 XTOB160LC1
2 4 6 98 96
160–220 1NO-1NC 185–250 A 400 1 315 1 600 800 XTOB220LC1
200–250 1NO-1NC 225–250 A 400 1 315 1 600 700 XTOB250LC1 29
200–300 1NO-1NC 225–300 A 630 1 630 1 600 700 XTOB300LC1
M–N 42–63 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 150 200 XTOT063C3S
(CT 60–90 97 95 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 250 250 XTOT090C3S 30
Operated) 85–125 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 500 400 XTOT125C3S
110–160 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 600 600 XTOT160C3S
160–240
98 96
1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 600 700 XTOT240C3S 31
190–290 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 600 700 XTOT290C3S
270–400 1NO-1NC 300–500 A — — 1000 1000 XTOT400C3S
360–540
420–630
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
500 A
630 A
—
—
—
—
600
600
1000
1000
XTOT540C3S
XTOT630C3S
32
1 For separate mounting, short-circuit Type 1 rating is 500 A and short-circuit Type 2 rating is 400 A.
2
3
The main current parameters are defined by the main current wiring that is used. 33
Go datasheet.moeller.net for more information complete data sheet by Article number.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 048
Dimensions
22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3.90 (99.0)
3.15 (80.0) 2.87 (73.0)
23 D1
24 1.67
(42.5) 5.43
(138.0)
H
25 2.91
(74.0)
26
0.20 (5.0) D2
0.65 (16.5) D
2.48 (63.0)
27 W
3.74 (95.0)
3.94 (100.0) 5.08 (129.0)
4.65 (118.0) 5.28 (134.0)
Figure 30.3-14. Frames B–C, XTOBXDINC DIN Rail or Panel Mount
28 Adapter and Frame D, XTOBXDIND DIN Rail or Panel Mount Adapter Figure 30.3-15. Frames F–G, XTOB…GC1 Overload Relay
H W D D1 D2
29 3.94 (100.0)
XTOB…CC1 3.46 (85.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3.56 (90.5) 2.30 (58.3) 0.15 (3.8)
XTOB…DC1 3.39 (86.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.41 (112.0) 3.17 (80.5) 0.19 (4.7)
30
4.76
(121.0)
31 2.91
(74.0)
32
3.74 (95.0) 2.48 (63.0)
33 3.90 (99.0) 5.08 (129.0)
4.65 (118.0) 5.28 (134.0)
34 Figure 30.3-16. Frames F–G, XTOB…G1CS Overload Relay
35 4.76 (121.0)
4.33 (110.0)
5.67 (144.0)
3.78 (96.0)
36 14.37 (11.0)
1.89 (48.0)
37
5.67
38 ** (144.0)
2.91 3.70
(74.0) (94.0)
39 6.65
*
0.28 (169.0)
(7.0)
40
41
0.20 * 0.28 (7.0) Dia.
0.98 (5.0)
(25.0) 0.65 **
42 5.04 (128.0)
(16.5) * = OFF
** = RESET/ON
0.43 (11.0) Dia.
43 Figure 30.3-17. Frames L and H, XTOB…LC1, HC1 Overload Relay

Sheet 30 049
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.80
22
2.03
(20.3) (51.5)
23
3.12
24
1.40
(35.5) (79.2)
1.16 1.89
(29.5) (48.0) 25
1.56
(39.5)
26
2.56 (65.0) 3.76 (95.5)
1.77 (45.0) 3.27 (83.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.02 (102.0)
27
Figure 30.3-18. Frames B–C, XTOB…BC1 and XTOB…CC1 Overload Figure 30.3-19. Frame D, XTOB…DC1 Overload Relay
Relays
28
7.28 (185.0)
0.17 (4.3) 0.30 (7.5) 0.06 (1.5) 7.28 (185.0)
29
0.31 (8.0)
1.73
0.83 (21.0) (44.0)
* M4
2.80 1.73 (44.0) 1.30 2.17 3.35 1.02 (26.0)
30
2.17
(71.0) (33.0) (55.0) (85.0) (55.0) *
31
1.02 6.26 (159.0)
(26.0)
6.77–9.84
(172.0–250.0)
* = RESET/ON
32
7.87 (200.0)
2.56 2.56 33
(65.0) (65.0)
2.80
34
(71.0)
90° 90° 90°
35
1.06
(27.0)
36
Figure 30.3-20. XTOT…C3S Current Transformer Operated Overload Relay 37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 050
Combination Motor Controllers
22 Combination Motor Controllers The XT CMC is UL 508 Type F approved, Features

meaning it is “self-protected” and
■ ON/OFF rotary handle with
doesn’t require the use of an additional
fuse or breaker for short circuit protec- lockout provision
23 tion. This approval means CMC’s can be ■ Visible trip indication
used in place of a traditional fuse-starter ■ Test trip function
and breaker-starter motor circuit. ■ Motor applications from
24 0.10 A to 65 A
Based around two key functional
components (MMP and contactor), ■ Class 10 overload protection
25 the CMC is a very cost effective means ■ Built-in heater and magnetic trip
to build a branch circuit. Fuses and elements to protect the motor
breakers must be oversized to prevent ■ Phase loss sensitivity
26 tripping during motor start up, and ■ Type 2 coordination
thus these oversized devices can
■ Ambient compensated up
no longer protect the motor. To
to 55 °C (140 °F)
27 compensate for this, a motor overload
■ Control inputs located at front of
relay is necessary to protect the motor.
starter for easy access and wiring
The manual motor protector was
28 invented in Germany by Moeller to
■ Wide range of coils
■ DIN rail mount—XTSC…BB_
correct this inefficiency. The MMP
operates similarly to a circuit breaker, ■ Mounting plates—XTSC…BC_,
29 Combination Motor Controllers except the inrush (magnetic) protection XTSC…D motor controllers
is set to 14 times the running current, ■ Adjustment dial for setting
30 General Description thus accounting for motor start-up motor FLA
current without the necessity to over- ■ Short-circuit trip at 14 times the
Eaton’s XT IEC open non-reversing and
size. A overcurrent dial was added to maximum setting of the FLA
reversing manual motor controllers
the face of the MMP to serve as the
31 combine a manual motor protector
motor overload protection. This
adjustment dial
with an IEC contactor(s) to provide a ■ UL 508 Type F CMC high fault
“motor protective circuit breaker”, as
complete motor protection solution by short-circuit ratings
32 it is referred to in Europe, now accom-
combining motor disconnect function, ■ 1NO-1NC auxiliary contact as
plishes all four key functions of a motor
thermal overload protection, magnetic standard on manual motor controller
branch circuit: disconnect, short circuit,
short-circuit protection and remote and combination motor controller
33 motor controller and motor overload
control operation in one compact,
protection. With the addition of a
assembled unit. these assembled
contactor, users have the ability to Standards and Certifications
manual motor controllers cover motors
34 remotely control the starter device. ■ UL 508 Type F combination
with FLA ratings from 0.10 A to 65 A.
motor controller
Whether a single motor application or
The UL 508 Type F labeled combination ■ IEC Type 2 Approved per
a multiple motor application, CMCs
35 motor controller (CMC) includes a line
are an ideal solution for machinery IEC 60947-4-1
side adapter (LSA). These assembled ■ UL Listed File No. E245398
OEMs and panel builders.
combination motor controllers cover
■ CE Mark
36 motors with FLA ratings from 0.10 A
to 65 A.
37 Application Description XTIEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers

The XT IEC non-reversing and
reversing manual and combination
38 motor controllers can be used in the Manual Motor Controller UL 508 Type F Combination Motor Controller
following applications: Use in group installation applications. Use for single motor branch circuits or use multiple
Upstream SCPD 1 is required and must CMC’s for a multiple motor panel applications. No
39 Group Motor Control be sized smaller than the maximum additional SCPD 1 is required in the branch, as these
Manual motor controllers (MMCs) upstream SCPD 1 rating on each MMC 2 devices are “self-protected”.
are ideal for group motor applications used. Tap rules should also be observed.
40 where an upstream breaker or fuse Line Side Adapter (LSA) Line Side Adapter (LSA)
provides protection for two or more Not required Required—factory assembled
motors. XT manual motor controllers
41 (MMC) combine a manual motor Manual Motor Controller Combination Motor Controller
protector, a wiring connector link XTSC/XTSR XTFC/XTFR
and IEC contactor.
42
Individual Branch Circuit for Motor Loads Figure 30.3-21. MMC and CMC Applications
Combination motor controller (CMC), Note: Technical Paper AP03402001E. Line side adapters are not required for non-U.S.
43 consisting of a line side adapter, manual applications. Most countries outside of the U.S. classify the MMP as a motor-protective
motor protector, wiring connector link circuit breaker.
and IEC contactor, provide an efficient 1 SCPD = Short-circuit protective device (circuit breaker, fuses).
means to build an entire branch circuit. 2 MMC = Manual motor controller

Sheet 30 051
Technical Data
Table 30.3-50. Combination Motor Controller Ratings
22
Frame MMP/ FLA Short Circuit Three-Phase Hp UL Three-Phase kW IEC Non- Reversing
Frame
Contactor
Maximum
Adjustment
Release—Irm
(Amperes)
200 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 220–240 V 380–415 V 500 V 660–690 V Reversing
Catalog
Catalog 23
Manual Motor Controller/Starter Combinations
B/B 16 224 3 3 10 7.5 4 7.5 9 12.5 XTSC_____ XTSR_____ 24
B/C 32 448 7.5 10 20 25 7.5 15 22 30 XTSC_____ XTSR_____
D/C 32 448 7.5 10 20 30 7.5 15 17.5 22 XTSC_____ XTSR_____
D/D 65 882 15 15 40 30 18.5 34 37 55 XTSC_____ XTSR_____
25
Combination Motor Controllers (CMC), UL 508 Type F
B/B 16 224 3 5 10 7.5 4 7.5 9 12.5 XTFC_____ XTFR______
B/C
D/C
32
32
448
448
7.5
7.5
10
10
20
25
—
30
7.5
7.5
15
15
22
17.5
30
22
XTFC_____
XTFC_____
XTFR______
XTFR______
26
D/D 65 882 15 15 40 30 18.5 34 37 55 XTFC_____ XTFR______
27
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 28
1.28 (32.5)
29
to Terminals
30
31
32
7.03
(178.5) 33
34
1.96 (49.7) 35
to Terminals
36
3.77 1.77
(95.7) (45.0)
37
Figure 30.3-22. XTSC…BB_
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 052
22 1.28 (32.5)
to Terminals
23
24
25
7.22
26 (183.4)
27
28 1.96 (49.7)
to Terminals
29
3.75 3.55
(95.3) (90.3)
30
Figure 30.3-23. XTSR…BB_
31
Mounting Holes 2.26 (57.5)
for M4 Screws to Terminals
or #8 Screws
32 (4 Places)
33
34
35 9.28
(235.7)
8.30 (210.8)
36 Mounting
9.01
(228.8)
37
38 3.42
(86.8)
to Terminals
39
0.35 (9.0)
40 1.34
(34.0)
4.89 1.78
(124.3) (45.2)
41 Figure 30.3-24. XTSC…BC_
42
43

Sheet 30 053
Mounting Holes for 7.72 (196.0)

22
M5 Screws or #10 Screws 3.28 (83.4)
(4 Places) to Terminals
23
24
25
26
27
10.47 (266.0) 11.18
Mounting (284.0) 28
29
5.62
(142.8) 30
to Coil
Terminals
31
32
0.35 (9.0)
6.24
2.17
(158.5)
(55.0) 33
1.71 (43.4) 6.78 (172.1)
Mounting to Optional Aux. Contacts
34
Figure 30.3-25. XTSC…DD
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 054
XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector
22 XT Electronic Manual Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications

Motor Protector Advanced Trip Unit ■ CE approved
■ UL Listed File No. E36332
23 ■ UL 508 group motor and Type E
■ IEC/EN 60947
■ CSA File 012528, Class 3211-05
24
25
26 In addition to the selectability, the XTPE

is also available with an advanced trip
unit that can communicate system
27 data and protector data through
SmartWire-DT®. SmartWire-DT is an
innovative cost-effective connection
28 XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector technology that enables quick installa-
tion of control wiring to the starter
General Description through a single green cable. When
29 The XT Electronic Manual Motor
on SmartWire-DT, the XTPE can
communicate the following:
Protector provides the same
functionality as the XT thermal manual ■ Current values
30 motor protector, but with an added ❑ Maximum phase current
level of flexibility and selectability. The
XTPE incorporates electronic control ❑ Overload warning
31 technology to enable more options and ■ Diagnostics data
larger dial setting ranges. The trip units ❑ Overload fault
are interchangeable, allowing users
32 to exchange as needed using the same
❑ Cause of trip (overcurrent or short
circuit)
base. The reduced number of part
numbers decreases bill of material ❑ Phase loss
33 complexity while reducing inventory ❑ Trip via TEST
demands. The XTPE electronic
■ Status messages
manual motor protector includes
34 the following features: ❑ Control unit type
❑ Overload setting
■ 4:1 maximum to minimum
35 overcurrent dial setting range ❑ Time-lag
■ Selectable trip class (5, 10, 15, 20) ❑ Switching status

■ Interchangeable trip units
36 XTPE Electronic MMP
■ Three base units (12, 32 and 65 A)
■ Common accessories with the XTPR
37
38
The XTPE Electronic MMP provides
the selectability, control, and insight
39 options that give panel builders and
OEMs the solutions necessary to
enhance motor control designs while
40 reducing total costs.
41
42
43

Sheet 30 055
XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector

Table 30.3-51. XT—Manual Motor Protector Catalog Numbering System
22
23
XT PE 004 B CS
Designation Trip Type
24
XT = XT line of IEC control Type MMP Frame CS = Standard
PE = Electronic MMP Overload Release B = 45 mm CA = Advanced (SmartWire-DT)
1P2 = 0.3–1.2 A D = 55 mm 25
004 = 1–4 A
012 = 3–12 A
032 = 8–32 A 26
065 = 16–65 A
Table 30.3-52. XT—Combinations Catalog Numbering System 27
XT FCE 004 B C CS A 28
Designation Coil Voltage

29
XT = XT line of IEC control A = 110 V 50 Hz, 120 V 60 Hz
Overload Release Contactor Frame B = 220 V 50 Hz, 240 V 60 Hz
Type 1P2 = 0.3–1.2 A C = 45 mm F = 230 V 50 Hz 30
004 = 1–4 A T = 24 V 50/60 Hz
FCE = Electronic combination TD= 24 Vdc
motor controller 012 = 3–12 A
032 = 8–32 A
MMP Frame
B = 45 mm
31
Trip Type
CS = Selectable class 5, 10, 15, 20
CA = Selectable, advanced 32
Trip Characteristics Dimensions 33
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
XTPE … 1.77
3.79 (96.2)
34
(45.0)
35
3.98
(101.0) 36
37
4.72 (120.0)
Figure 30.3-27. XT Electronic MMP—B Frame 38

4.65 (118.0)
39
2.22 40
(56.5)
6.30
(160.0) 1.28 41
(32.5)
0.57
42
(14.5)
1.38 0.22 (5.5)
(35.0) 5.00 (127.0) 43
2.17 6.77 (172.0)
(55.0) 7.36 (187.0)
Figure 30.3-26. XT Electronic Manual Motor Controllers Figure 30.3-28. XT Electronic MMP—D Frame

Sheet 30 056
EMS—Electronic Motor Starter
22 EMS—Electronic Features and Benefits Easy Installation

The EMS comes equipped with
Motor Starter Multifunctional push-in terminals for quick and easy
The EMS comes with an optional wiring of power and control circuits.
23 reversing start feature, eliminating Push-in terminals provide 60% time
the need for an additional contactor. savings over screw-in terminals and
The optional E-stop functionality better contact against vibrations.
24 eliminates the need for a separate
E-stop contactor. Available with Standards and Certifications
SmartWire-DT connection, reducing
25 installation cost and providing
■ UL
communication means of critical data. Safety Rated
26 Extended Life Functional safety is growing in
importance for the machinery OEM.
High-electrical life provides up to The EMS is rated at SIL3 per IEC 62061
30 million operations. The EMS is ideal
27 for customer applications requiring
and PLe per ISO® 13849, meeting the
most stringent of safety requirements.
multiple motor start/stops per hour.
The EMS carries IEC and UL short-
28 circuit ratings, with 100 kAIC UL short-
circuit rating when mated with 30 A
Class J fuse.
29
EMS—Electronic Motor Starter Catalog Number Selection
30 General Description Table 30.3-53. EMS—Electronic Motor Starter Catalog Numbering System
The electronic motor starter (EMS)
31 is the latest technology in safe and effi-
cient motor starting from Eaton’s
EMS ROS T 2.4 24VDC
Electrical Sector. The EMS is a full
32 starter with built-in solid-state contacts Device Type Control Voltage
and integral overload protection. Its EMS = Electronic Configuration/ Ampere Rating 24VDC = 24 Vdc
compact size and high-electrical life motor starter Function 2.4 = 2.4 A
33 make it an ideal replacement for the DO = Non-reversing
DOS = Non-reversing
9 =9A
traditional contactor/overload relay
with E-stop
starter configuration. RO = Reversing
34 ROS = Reversing
Application Description with E-stop
A versatile solution, the EMS also
35 supports the following installation
applications:
36 ■ Logistics
■ Conveyer control
■ Production machines
37 ■ Tooling machines
■ Packaging machines
38 ■ Small elevators
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 057
EMS—Electronic Motor Starter
Dimensions
22
[s]
1000
23
600
300 400
200
60
100
40
24
30
20
10
6
6.18 3 4
2
10 25
(157.0) 1
0.6
0.3 0.4
0.2
0 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I / In
EMS-…-2,4-…
EMS-…-9-…(Ir ≤ 4A) 27
1.18 [s]
4.86 (123.5)
(30.0) 600
1000 28
300 400
200
Figure 30.3-29. EMS without SmartWire-DT 100
60
30
40
20
29
10
6
3 4
2
1 10 A
30
0.6
0.3 0.4
0.2
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I / In
31
EMS-…-9-…(Ir > 4A)
6.18 32
(157.0)
Figure 30.3-31. Trip Type EMS
Table 30.3-54. Rated Operational Current EMS-…-SWD 33

Temperature (ºC) 40 45 50 55 60
EMS-…- 2,4 - SWD 34
Stand-alone device 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
1.18 4.88 (124.0) Connected in series, with a distance 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
(30.0) equal to one housing width 35
Connected in series, without 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 —
Figure 30.3-30. EMS with SmartWire-DT any distance
EMS-…- 9 - SWD 36
Stand-alone device 9 9 9 9 7.6
Connected in series, with a distance 9 9 7.6 7.6 5.2
equal to one housing width 37
Connected in series, without 7.6 6.8 5.2 2.4 —
any distance
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018
Sheet 30 058

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage 30.4-1
January 2018 Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical
Sheet 30 059
General Description
Low Voltage Reduced Voltage 22

Starter Selection Guide
In general, the application will determine the type of starter required. In cases where more than one type starter will meet 23
the application requirements, reference to the table below will show which starter is best suited for the application.
Table 30.4-1. Reduced Voltage Starting Characteristics and Index
Starter Starting Characteristics Expressed in % Remarks Page
24
Type of Rated Starting Values (Approximate)
Motor
Voltage
Motor
Current
Line
Current
Torque 25
Autotransformer 30.4-2
Class ECA42 26
80% Tap 80 80 67 1 64 The adjustable voltage taps permit wide adjustment of characteristics
65% Tap 65 65 45 1 42 in the field.
28 1
50% Tap 50 50 25
30.4-3
27
Part winding 100 65 65 50 Requires part winding motor. A nine-lead 230/460 V dual voltage motor
Class ECA45 may be used in 230 V applications. Closed transition.
Wye-delta
Class ECA48
100 33 33 33 Requires delta wound motor with wye connections.
Ideal for long accelerations. Closed transition is available.
30.4-4 28
Class ECA51
30.5-1
Solid-state
S801/811
Ramps
0–100%
Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Compatible with NEMA Design A, B or C motors.
0–92% 0–92% 0–85% Adjustable ramp up and ramp down. thru 29
S611 30.5-49
DS6/DS7
1 Includes autotransformer magnetizing current. 30
General Application
31
The following factors should be the mechanical limitations of the load with the starter. Low voltage release,
considered when applying reduced- or electrical limitations of the source, or where power is applied to the motor
voltage starters to a squirrel cage both. after a power failure, can be obtained by
motor-driven load. using a two-wire pilot device 32
A reduced-voltage or reduced-inrush (temperature, switch and so on). Low
1. The motor characteristics that will starter will reduce both starting current voltage protection, where power is not
satisfy the starting requirements of
the load.
and starting torque. Care must be taken
when meeting power company limita-
applied to the motor after a power failure 33
until restarted by an operator, can be
tions that the motor will produce suffi- obtained by using three-wire control
2. The source of power and the effect cient torque to accelerate the load to
the motor starting current will have near rated speed.
such as START STOP pushbuttons. 34
on the line voltage. Closed transition wye-delta types
Part-winding starters are suited to require adequate ventilation to remove
3. The load characteristics and the low starting torque loads such as
effect the motor starting torque will fans, blowers and m-g sets. Autotrans-
resistor heat. 35
have on the driven parts former starters should be used with Eaton also offers a line of solid-state
during acceleration. “hard to start” loads such as reciprocat- reduced-voltage starters known as
The starter protection required to ing compressors, grinding mills, and Easy-start. 36
protect the load, motor, starter, cables pumps. Wye-delta starters are applica-
ble to high inertia loads with long accel- Solid-state starters are ideally suited for
and power source during overload, many loads including conveyor applica-
undervoltage and fault conditions. eration times which as centrifugal
compressors and centrifuges. tions since they provide controlled accel- 37
A typical NEMA B motor started with eration from zero to full load.
full voltage will develop as much as All starters, in addition to overload pro-
UL listing—Combination E176513,
150% full-load torque when started with tection, will provide either low voltage
Non-Combination E19224. 38
a starting current of around 600% full- release or low voltage protection
load current. These values may exceed depending upon the pilot device used
39
Starting Characteristics
700
Full Voltage Starting
700
Full Voltage Starting
700 40
Line Current, % of Full Load
600 600 600
500
500
Part Winding Starting
500
41
400 400 400
Wye-Delta Starting KVA
300 300 300
(Closed Transition)
200 200 200
42
Autotransformer
Starting on 65% Tap Full Load Current Torque
100 100 100
0
Full Load Current
0 0
20 40 60 80 100
43
Motor Speed Full Load Motor Speed Full Load
Speed Speed Motor Speed Full Load Speed
Figure 30.4-1. Autotransformer Starting Figure 30.4-2. Wye-Delta or Part Figure 30.4-3. Solid-State Starter
Winding Starting

30.4-2 Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage
Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical January 2018
Sheet 30 060
Autotransformer Type
General Description Table 30.4-3. NEMA Contactor Size (1S). The interlock (1S) closes, energiz-
22 Autotransformer type starters are
Guidelines within Autotransformer Starters ing the timing relay (TR) and contactor
Maximum NEMA Size (2S) which seal in through the interlock
the most widely used reduced-voltage hp (2S). With the (1S) and (2S) contactors
Starter Contactor
23 starter because of their efficiency and
flexibility. All power taken from the line, Run Starting
closed, the motor is connected through
the autotransformer for reduced-volt-
except transformer losses, is transmit- (1S) (2S) age start. After a preset time interval, the
(3-Pole) (3-Pole)
24 ted to the motor to accelerate the load. (TRTO) contacts time open, de-energiz-
Taps on the transformer allow adjust- 230 V, 60 Hz ing contactor (1S) and connecting the
ment of the starting torque and inrush to 15 2 2 2 2 autotransformer as a reactor in series
25 meet the requirements of most applica- 30
50
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
with the motor. Interlock (1S) immedi-
tions. The following characteristics are ately energizes the run contactor (R)
100 5 5 5 5
produced by the three voltage taps: 200 6 6 6 6 which seals in through its interlock (R).
26 Table 30.4-2. Starting Characteristics
300 7 7 63
73
6 The run contacts are now closed, and
450 8 8 7 the motor is running at full voltage.
Tap Starting Torque Line Inrush 460–575 V, 60 Hz Start contactor (2S) and relay (TR) are
% Locked % Locked
27 Torque Ampere 25 2 2 2 2 de-energized when interlock (R) opens.
50 3 3 3 3
100 4 4 4 4
An overload, opening the STOP push-
50% 1 25% 28% 2 button or other pilot device de-ener-
200 5 5 5 5
28 65%
80%
42%
64%
45% 2
67% 2 400 6 6 6 6 gizes the (R) contactor removing the
600 7 7 63 6 motor from the line.
1 Not included 50 hp and below. 900 8 8 73 7
29 2 Includes transformer magnetizing current. 3 1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8. Other Types
Autotransformer starters are also
Closed transition is standard on all Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram) available in combination and reversing
30 sizes ensuring a smooth transition Closing the START button or other pilot types.
from reduced to full voltage. Since device energizes the start contactor
the motor is never disconnected from
31 the line there is no interruption of line R 3C
current which can cause a second
100%
80%
65%
50%
0%
RVNR AUTOXFMR (3-coil) 2S 1S OL T1
inrush during transition. R 5C
3E
1C
T2
Motor
32 L1 L1 #1
100%
CKT BKR
80%
65%
50%
T3
0%
2S 1S
or
Duty cycle of these starters is as follows: L2
L3
L2
L3
SW & FU
#2
#3 R
5E 1E
3D
up to 200 hp, 15 seconds on each
100%
80%
65%
50%
0%
2S 1S
4 minutes for 1 hour, repeated after
33 2 hours. Over 200 hp, three periods
5D
Stopped
1D TBX2
1S R
of 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF 7 8 9 10
G
repeated after 1 hour.
34 Run
R
Design Features On-Delay

1.5 – 15 Sec.
35 Contactors—(1S) (2S) (Run) TB1 TB1 Stop TB2
Start
TB3 2 TR
E
7 TB4
OL OTT "C" OTT "E" OTT "D"
95 96 B C D
A three-pole (1S) and a three-pole
3 8 TR 5 51 R
52 A1
1S
A2 Auto-Transformer
Overtemp SWa
36 contactor (2S) connect the motor to the T.O.

2S
auto-transformer for reduced-voltage PS
2S 1S 53 A1 A2
Auto
starting (see Table 30.4-3 for size). TB1 TB1 TB3
2S
Off T.O. = Timed Opening
37 A three-pole contactor (Run) bypasses Hand 8 TR 6 54 1S
55 A1
R
A2 T.C. = Timed Closing
T.C.
the autotransformer and connects the
motor for full-voltage across-the-line Figure 30.4-4. Typical Schematic Diagram
38 running (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
Table 30.4-4. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
Reduced Voltage Enclosures
39 Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12
Box Shipping Box Shipping
No. Weight No. Weight
40 Lb (kg) Lb (kg)
Class 42: Autotransformer—Non-combination
Class 43: Autotransformer—with Disconnect
41 Class 44: Autotransformer—with HMCP
2–4 E2 124 (56) E2 149 (68)
5 F1E 885 (402) F1E 1010 (459)
42 64 F1E 1220 (554) F1E 1345 (611)
63 F2E 1400 (636) F2E 1525 (692)
5 5
43 7 F2E
5
F2E
5
8 F2E F2E
9 5 5 5 5
4 Non-combination and breaker.

5 Consult factory. refer to Page 30.6-3.

Sheet 30 061
Part-Winding Type
General Description Overload Relay—(OL) (1M) which seals in through its inter-
Part-winding starting provides conve- Two three-pole Type B overload lock (1M) and energizes the timer (TR). 22
relays provide starting and running The (1M) contacts connect the first
nient, economical one-step acceleration half-winding of the motor across the
at reduced current where the power overcurrent protection.
company specifies a maximum or
line. After a preset time interval, the 23
Timing Relay—(TR) timer (TRTC) contact closes energizing
limits the increments of current drawn contactor (2M). The (2M) contact con-
An electrically operated pneumatic
from the line. These starters can be
relay provides accurate, adjustable nects the second half-winding of the 24
used with nine-lead dual-voltage motor across-the-line.
start-to-run transfer timing.
motors on the lower voltage and with
Opening the STOP button or other
special part-winding motors designed Other Types
pilot device de-energizes contactors
25
for any voltage. When used with dual- Part-winding Type ECN45 starters are
voltage motors, it should be estab- (1M), (2M) and timer (TR), removing
also available in combination (Type 46
the motor from the line.
lished that the torque produced by and 47), reversing and three-point 26
the first half-winding will accelerate the (primary resistor) types. Table 30.4-6. Contactor Sequence
load sufficiently so as not to produce
Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram) Contactor Start Run
a second undesirable inrush when the 27
second half-winding is connected to the Closing the START button or other pilot 1M ● ●
line. Most motors will produce a start- device energizes the start contactor 2M — ●
ing torque equal to between 1/2 to 2/3 28
of NEMA standard values with half of
the winding energized and draw about Part Winding Select Overload Heater Packs for 50%
2/3 of normal line current inrush. L1
L2
L1
L2
CKT BKR
or
#1
#2
1M OL T1
T2
Motor
of Rated Full Load Motor Current
29
SW & FU T3
L3 L3 #3
Design Features 2M OL T7
T8 30
Contactors—(1M) (2M) T9
TBX2
A three-pole contactor (1M) connects 7 1M 8
Stopped
only the first half-winding of the motor G 31

for reduced inrush current on starting Run
R
(see table below for size). A three-pole (1M) (2M)
contactor (2M) connects the second TB1 TB1

Stop
TB2
Start
TB3 A1
1M
A2 TB4
95
OL
96
A OL
95 96
32
half-winding of the motor for running 1M
On-Delay 1.5 – 15 Sec.
PS TR
(see table below for size). TB1 TB1
Auto
TB3
2
E
7
Table 30.4-5. NEMA Contactor Size

Off
T.C. = Timed Closing 8 TR 6 5 A1
2M
A2
33
Hand
Guidelines within Part Winding Starters T.C.
Maximum NEMA Size

Figure 30.4-5. Typical Schematic Diagram
34
hp Starter Contactor
(1M) (2M) Table 30.4-7. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
230 V, 60 Hz Reduced Voltage Enclosures 35
15 1 PW 1 1 Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12
25 2 PW 2 2
50 3 PW 3 3
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
36
75 4 PW 4 4 Lb (kg) Lb (kg)
150 5 PW 5 5
Class 45: Part Winding—Non-combination
300 6 PW 6 6
2PW 3 25 (11) 7 75 (34)
37
460–575 V, 60 Hz
3PW– 9 47 (21) 9 95 (43)
15 1 PW 1 1 4PW
40 2 PW 2 2
5PW E 125 (47) E 180 (82)
38
75 3 PW 3 3
150 4 PW 4 4 6PW F1E 780 (354) F1E 880 (400)
350
600
5 PW
6 PW
5
6
5
6
7PW F2E 1 F2E 1
39
8PW F2E 1 F2E 1
Class 46: Part Winding—with Disconnect

Class 47: Part Winding—with Thermal-Magnetic 40
Trip Circuit Breaker
2PW C 68 (31) C 88 (40)
3PW D 162 (74) D 190 (86) 41
4PW E 230 (104) E 270 (123)
5PW F1E 440 (200) F1E 530 (241)
6PW 2 F1E 440 (200) F1E 620 (281)
42
6PW 3 F2E 515 (234) F2E 1
7PW F2E 1
1
F2E 1
1
43
8PW F2E F2E
1 Consult factory.
3 Fusible. refer to Page 30.6-3.

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical January 2018
Sheet 30 062
Wye-Delta Type
General Description Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram) Interlock opens, de-energizes the timer
22 Wye-delta type starters are applied Closing the START button or other pilot (TR) opening timer (TRTC) thus energiz-
device energizes contactor (1S) whose ing contactor (2S).
extensively to industrial air condition-
contacts connect the motor in a wye
23 ing installations because they are par-
ticularly suited for starting motors connection. Interlock (1S) closes, ener-
An overload, opening the STOP button
or other pilot device de-energizes con-
driving high inertia loads with resulting gizing contactor (1M) and timer (TR). tactors (1M) and (2M), removing the
The (1M) contacts energize the motor
24 long acceleration times. They are not,
windings in a wye. After a preset time
motor from the line. (TRP) de-energizes
however, limited to this application. and locks out the control circuit if the
When six- or 12-lead delta-connected interval, timer (TRTC) contact closes duty cycle of the transition resistors
energizing contactor (2S). Interlock (2S)
25 motors are started wye-connected,
opens, dropping out contactor (1S).
is exceeded.
approximately 58% of line voltage is
applied to each winding and the motor The motor is now energized in series Wye-delta Class ECN51 closed transition
with the resistors. Interlock (1S) closes, starters are also available in combina-
26 develops 33% of full-voltage starting
energizing contactor (2M), bypassing tion types and Class ECN48 open
torque and draws 33% of normal
locked-rotor current from the line. the resistors and energizing the transition non-combination and
delta connected motor at full voltage. combination starters.
27 When the motor is accelerated, it is
reconnected for normal data operation.
Elementary Diagram
28 Design Features Shop Note:
Refer to Figure 2. Connect Green Ground
T6
T4
Wire to Panel Using Hole Located Adjacent
to Transformer ’s Mounting Foot. 2M 1S 1S T5
Contactors—(1S) (1M) (2S) (2M) Wye-Delta Open Transition
OL
1S
1M T1
29 A three-pole contactor (1S) 1 shorts L1
L2
L1 Circuit Breaker 1
L2 or Switch 2
T2
T3
Motor
the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during L3 L3 and Fuse 3

Select Overload Heater Coils for 58%
starting to connect motor in wye of Rated Full Load Motor Current
30 (see Table 30.4-8 for size). 5

1S
6 7
2M
8
G
Stopped
Run
TBX2
R
A three-pole contactor (1M) energizes Stop TB2 Start
TB3 ON-Delay 1.5-15 Seconds 2 TR 7
TB4
OL
E
31 motor leads T1-T2-T3 for both wye and TB1 TB1

1S 8 TR 5 51 2M 52 A1 1S A2
95 96
delta connections (see Table 30.4-8 1M

T.O.
53 A1 1M A2
1S
for size). PS
1M
Auto
32 A three-pole contactor (2S) connects
TB1 TB1
Hand
OFF
TB3 8 TR 6
T.C.
54
1S
55 A1 2M A2 T.O. = Timed Opening
T.C. = Timed Closing
resistors in series with the motor wind-

ings during the start-to-run transition Figure 30.4-6. Wye-Delta—Open Transition
33 period (see Table 30.4-8 for size).
A three-pole contactor (2M) energizes
34 the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during run- Wye-Delta
Closed Transition 2M T6
ning to connect the motor in delta L1 L1 CKT BKR #1
T4
L2 L2 or #2
(see Table 30.4-8 for size). L3 L3 SW & FU #3
T5
35 Table 30.4-8. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines 2S

1S 1S
1S
T2B
T3B
T1B
Max. NEMA Size

36 hp Select Overload Heater Coils
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
Starter Contactor for 58% of Rated Full Load

Motor Current
(1M) (2M) (1S) (2S) 1M OL T1
230 V, 60 Hz T1A T2
37 10 1 YD 1 1 1 1
T2A T3
Motor
T3A
25 2 YD 2 2 2 1 1S 2M Stopped TBX2
50 3 YD 3 3 3 1 5 5 7 8
38 75 4 YD 4 4 4 2
G
Run
150 5 YD 5 5 4 3
R
300 6 YD 6 6 5 4
On-Delay 1.5 – 15 Sec. TR
39 500
800
7 YD
8 YD
7
8
7
8
61
71
5
6
TB1 TB1
Stop
TB2
Start
TB3 2
E
7
2M 1S
460–575 V, 60 Hz 1S 51 2S 52 A1 A2 TB4 1 TRP 4
95 96
40 15 1 YD 1 1 1 1 1M
TRP
T.O.
40 2 YD 2 2 2 1 1 TR 3 53 2
E
7
75 3 YD 3 3 3 1 PS T.C. 2S
150 4 YD 4 4 4 2 Auto A1 A2
41 300 5 YD 5 5 4 3
TB1 TB1
Off
TB3
1S 1M T.O. = Timed Opening
54 A1 A2
700 6 YD 6 6 5 4 Hand T.C. = Timed Closing
1M
1000 7 YD 7 7 61 5
42 1500 8 YD 8 8 71 6 8 TR 6 55 1S
56 A1
2M
A2
1 1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8. T.C.
43 Figure 30.4-7. Wye-Delta—Closed Transition

Sheet 30 063
Wye-Delta Type
Table 30.4-9. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures

Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12 22
Box No. Shipping Weight Box No. Shipping Weight
Lb (kg) Lb (kg)
Classes 48 & 51: Wye-Delta—Non-combination 23
Classes 49 & 52: Wye-Delta—with Disconnect
Classes 50 & 53: Wye-Delta—with Thermal
Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker 24
2YD–4YD E 185 (84) E 225 (102)
5YD F1E 605 (275) F1E 705 (320)
6YD 1 F1E 635 (288) F1E 735 (334)
25
6YD 2 F2E 715 (325) F2E 830 (377)
7YD F2E 3
3
F2E 3
3
26
8YD F2E F2E
2 Fusible. 27
3 Consult factory.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018
Sheet 30 064

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018 Reduced Voltage—Solid-State
Sheet 30 065
General Description—Solid-State Reduced Voltage
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters Typical Applications

22
■ Centrifugal and screw compressors
■ Material handling equipment
■ Fans and blowers 23
■ Pumps
■ Cranes and hoists
■ Food processing 24
■ Machinery
■ Rock crushers 25
■ HVAC industry
Enclosure Types 26
Airborne particulate may be detrimental
to starter performance and reliability,
so caution must be exercised in
27
choosing the enclosure best suited
to the environment. The NEMA rating 28
of the enclosure defines its ability
to withstand the ingress of foreign
particulate as described below: 29
Reduced Voltage Starters
NEMA 1
General Description Application Description A general purpose, indoor-type
enclosure.
30
Eaton offers a complete line of solid- Eaton’s soft starters can be applied in
state reduced voltage devices ranging a wide array of customer applications.
NEMA 12
from fractional horsepower applica- Typical benefits of soft starters include:
A dust-tight and drip-tight enclosure
31
tions to 1000 A devices. The line comes
■ Reduced starting torque stress on for indoor industrial applications.
in voltages from 200 to 600 Vac and
mechanical equipment, allowing
operates on 50 or 60 Hz applications.
longer life of belts, gears, pulleys and NEMA 3R 32
Units can be ordered as open
components or mounted in enclosures motor shafts commonly weakened Enclosures are intended for outdoor
during “across-the-line” starting use, primarily to provide a degree of
(NEMA 1, 3R, 4X and 12). Motor
■ Reduction of voltage drop during protection against falling rain, sleet 33
control center (MCC) mounting is
also possible with units through 700 hp starting on weak utility systems and external ice formation.
fitting inside of a standard MCC. where the performance of nearby 34
NEMA 4
equipment would be negatively
These soft starters provide reduced affected A watertight and dust-tight enclosure
voltage starting of AC induction motors. for either indoor or outdoor use.
Motor voltage is controlled by means
■ Reduced inrush current during 35
starting which can result in lower NEMA 4X
of back-to-back SCRs (silicon controlled utility bills due to the reduction in
rectifiers) providing a smooth, stepless Identical to NEMA 4, with the additional
start (and stop) of the motor driven load.
peak current demand charges requirement that the enclosure be 36
■ Smooth, stepless starting of a corrosion-proof as well.
For more information, please motor, allowing superior flexibility
visit the Eaton Web site at over typical electromechanical NEMA 7/9 37
www.eaton.com/electrical. starting methods Enclosures capable of preventing the
■ Ability to start large loads on backup entrance of dust and withstanding
Designed to control acceleration and
generators during power outages pressure resulting from an internal 38
deceleration of three-phase motors, explosion of specified gas.
products are available from 0.25 to ■ Elimination of the water-hammer
50 A and are suitable for mounting in a effect in hydraulic systems, which 39
variety of enclosures including Type 1, can help to eliminate additional pipe
12, 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9. hangers and extend the life of the
system, pumps, valves and gaskets 40
41
42
43

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State January 2018
Sheet 30 066
General Description

22 Table 30.5-1. Solid-State Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
23 EC S 90 S 1 C A A
24 Type Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings
S = Solid-state A = None G = 100 A/600 V R N = 600 A/600 V R
25 B
C
= 30 A/250 V R
= 30 A/600 V R
H = 200 A/250 V R
J = 200 A/600 V R
P
Q
= 800 A/600 V L
= 1200 A/600 V L
Class
D = 60 A/250 V R K = 400 A/250 V R R = 1600 A/600 V L
90 = Non-combination reduced voltage E = 60 A/600 V R L = 400 A/600 V R S = 2000 A/600 V L
26 soft starter—S801
F = 100 A/250 V R M = 600 A/250 V R T = By description
91 = Combination reduced voltage
Breaker
soft starter—fusible disconnect—S801
27 92 = Combination reduced voltage
A
B
= None
=3A
F = 50 A
W = 70 A
K
L
= 400 A
= 600 A
soft starter—circuit breaker—S801
C =7A G = 100 A P = 1200 A
93 = Non-combination reduced voltage D = 15 A H = 150 A Q = 1600 A
28 soft starter—S811 E = 30 A J = 250 A
94 = Combination reduced voltage
soft starter—fusible disconnect—S811 Cover Control
29 95 = Combination reduced voltage See Table 30.6-3 for options
soft starter—circuit breaker—S811
30 Voltage
Amperes
S801/S811 B = 230 V E = 200 V
31 Q = 37 Z = 240 5 = 650
C = 460 V
D = 575 V
Q = 24 Vdc
S = 66 1 = 304 6 = 720
V = 105 2 = 360 7 = 850
32 W
Y
= 135
= 180
3
4
= 420
= 500
8 = 1000 Enclosure Type
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 3R
33 3 = Type 4
4 = Type 4X (304-Grade SS)
6 = Type 7/9
34 8 = Type 12
9 = Type 4X (316-Grade SS)
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 067
General Description
Table 30.5-2. Solid-State Product Comparison

Description S801 S811 Communicating 22
Soft Starter Soft Starter
Maximum current range

Start type
1–1000 A
Ramp or current limit
1–1000 A
Ramp or current limit
23
Operating voltage 200–600 Vac 200–600 Vac
Operating frequency
Control voltage
47–63 Hz
24 Vdc
47–63 Hz
24 Vdc
24
Kick start 0–2 seconds adjustable 0–2 seconds adjustable
Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds 0.5–180 seconds
Initial torque setting 0%–85% 0%–85% 25
Current limit setting 0%–550% 0%–550%
Soft stop 0–60 seconds 0–60 seconds
Pump control option Yes Yes 26
Overtemperature protection Yes Yes
Overload Yes Yes
Overload setting 30%–100% 30%–100% 27
Trip class setting 5, 10, 20 and 30 5, 10, 20 and 30
Phase loss/unbalance Yes Yes
Jam
Stall
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
28
Phase reversal Yes Yes
Jog Yes Yes
Extended start Yes Yes 29
LED status indication Yes LCD—Yes
LED fault indication Yes LCD—Yes
30
Table 30.5-3. Application and Environmental Considerations
The installation environment for a solid-state reduced voltage starter is of a prime concern. Conditions such as ambient
temperature, altitude and the presence of corrosives or moisture must all be considered when choosing the appropriate 31
starter size and enclosure type.
Description S801 S811 Communicating
Soft Starter Soft Starter 32
Temperature—operating (No derating) –25º C to +40 ºC –30 ºC to +50 ºC
Current rating (50 ºC)
Limited duty cycle (50 ºC)
100%
Fully rated
100%
Fully rated
33
Current rating (60 ºC) 10% reduction Consult factory
Limited duty cycle (60 ºC)
Temperature—storage
Continuous duty cycle at 90%
–40 ºC to +70 ºC
Consult factory
–50 ºC to +70 ºC
34
Altitude (meters) 2000 2000
Note: Consult factory for applications outside of these parameters for additional information and sizing requirements. 35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 068
General Description
22 Multi-Motor Operation Starting Torque EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 480 V NEMA B

motor has a full load current of 125
The reduced voltage applied to the amperes. A typical soft start on this
The S801/S811 line can be used
motor results in reduced inrush motor is 300% current limit for 40
to control multiple motors if the
23 following conditions are met:
current and a soft start. However,
it reduces the starting torque of the
seconds. The heat generation during
this time period is:
■ The current rating of the S801/S811 motor. The relationship is as follows:
24 should be equal to or greater than
Torque at reduced current
125 amperes x 300% =
the total of the individual motor ---------------------------------------------------------------------- = 375 watts for 40 seconds
full load amperes and the S801/S811 Torque at full current
At the end of the ramp, the bypass
25 overload must be set for the Current at reduced voltage
2
contactor closes and total heat genera-
cumulative full load amperes --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Current at full voltage tion is reduced to much lower levels.
of the motors
26 ■ Individual motor overcurrent EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 1800 RPM, 460 V NEMA Design C and D Motors,
protection is provided by NEMA B motor draws six times full
other devices load amperes for starting, and starting Wound Rotor Motors
27 ■ The motors should not be torque is 150% of full load torque. These motors are used due to their
mechanically coupled together, high starting torque characteristics.
If the same motor were started with When high starting currents and high
i.e., two motors on same shaft
28 ■ NEC and local code requirements
the S801 at 300% current limit, then starting torques are required, it may be
the available torque would be: necessary to order the extended ramp
for individual motor protection
and branch short circuit protection 2 option and oversize the soft starter to
29 are met
300 90,000
------------ = --------------------- = match the application requirements.
600 360,000 Consult the factory for application con-
■ Motors are closely matched in total
1/4 x 150% full load torque = siderations.
30 load and size
37.5% full load torque available
Frequent Starting/Stopping
31 The number of starts and stops Heat Generation
allowable depends upon many factors. Due to the voltage drop that occurs
The most important ones are: across a SCR, there is heat generated
32 in the unit. For sizing an enclosure
1. Set level of the starting current limit
or box size for the soft starters, it is
33 2. Start time important to account for this heat
generation.
3. Run time
The S801/S811 lines use a bypass
34 4. Off time before next start contactor, so heat generation is mini-
The number of starts per hour is based mized. During steady-state conditions,
on the current carrying capacity of it generates about the same amount of
35 the SCRs. A high start/stop duty may heat as an across-the-line starter of the
require the oversizing of a soft starter. same size. During start and stopping
If a high number of multiple starts ramps it will generate three watts of
36 occur, the starter may trip due to the heat per ampere.
overload protection for the motor or
37 it may trip on overtemperature of the
soft starter. In this situation, it is advis-
able to wait a period of 10 minutes
38 before restarting to avoid damage to
the soft starter and motor and allow
the units to cool down. The motor
39 manufacturer should be consulted
about the effect of a high number
of multiple starts on motor life.
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 069
General Description
Solid-State Reduced Table 30.5-5. Combination Solid-State

Reduced Voltage 22
Voltage Starters Rating SSRV Comb. with Comb. with
Fuses HMCP
Enclosed Box Selection Box No. 3 Box No. 3 23
Table 30.5-4. Non-combination Solid-State 37 A S801/S811 B1 A1 4
Reduced Voltage
Rating SSRV Non-combination
66 A
105 A
S801/S811
S801/S811
C
D
A1
B1
24
135 A S801/S811 D C
Box No. 1
180 A S801/S811 E E
37 A S801/S811 7A 240 A S801/S811 F1E E
25
66 A S801/S811 7A 304 A S801/S811 F1E E
105 A S801/S811 7A 360 A S801/S811 F1E E
135 A S801/S811 B1 420 A S801/S811 F1E E 26
180 A S801/S811 C 500 A S801/S811 F1E E
240 A S801/S811 2 650 A S801/S811 F1E F1E
304 A S801/S811 2
2
720 A S801/S811 F1E F1E 27
360 A S801/S811 850 A S801/S811 F1E F1E
420 A S801/S811 10 1000 A S801/S811 F1E F1E
500 A S801/S811 10
650 A S801/S811 10
3 Enclosure space will also accommodate for 28
an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,
720 A S801/S811 10
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes
850 A S801/S811 10
1000 A S801/S811 10 4
space for a DNA module or MOV.
Same as footnote 3, but CPT is not included.
29
1 Enclosure space will also accommodate for Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a
an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays, CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes 30
space for a DNA module or MOV.
2 Contact Eaton for Box Dimensions not
shown in PG03300001E. 31
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 070
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
22 S801 Solid-State Reduced Catalog Number Selection

Voltage Soft Starter Table 30.5-6. S801 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
23 S 801 N66 N 3 S
S = Soft Starter B = Level sensing
24 D = Inside the delta
L = Extended ramp start
801 = Non-combination Soft Starter
S = Standard soft starter
25 overload
Ampacity Rating W = Without CIM (control
interface module)
N37 = 37 A U50 = 500 A 2
26 N66 = 66 A V36 = 360 A
R10 = 105 A V42 = 420 A 3 = Three-pole device
R13 = 135 A V50 = 500 A
27 T18 = 180 A
T24 = 240 A
V65
V72
= 650 A
= 720 A
N = No options
T30 = 304 A P = Pump control
V85 = 850 A
U36 = 360 A V = 690 V option 1
V10 = 1000 A
28 U42 = 420 A
S801 Reduced Voltage Soft Starters

1 Not available on U-Frame.
29 General Description 2 U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.
Eaton’s S801 line of reduced voltage that is adjustable from 30% to 100% of ❑ Stall
30 soft starters is very compact, multi- rating and can be set for Trip Class 5, ❑ Phase reversal
functional, easy-to-install and 10, 20 or 30. It also provides additional
easy-to-program. Designed to control ❑ Phase loss/unbalance
protection for jam, stall, phase reversal,
31 acceleration and deceleration of three- phase loss, overtemperature, under- ❑ Shorted SCR detection
phase motors, the line is available in voltage and so on. Along with the ❑ Overtemperature
current ranges from 12 to 1000 A and overload, the unit has a built-in run
32 is suitable for mounting in motor bypass contactor. This device is closed ■ Selectable ramp or current
control centers or in enclosed control when the soft starter is up to speed limit start.
(NEMA 1, 4, 4X and 12) applications. providing a low impedance bypass for ■ Kick Start:
33 This product line is designed to compete the SCRs and significantly reducing the ❑ Adjustable from 0%–85%
head-to-head with the high-end soft amount of heat that is generated in the initial torque
soft starter.
34 starter market, offering improved
performance and dramatically smaller
❑ 0–2.0 seconds adjustment time
The S801 is designed to work with
size versus the competition. By having ■ Ramp Start:
three-phase motors in a delta (three-
35 the over-load functionality and bypass lead) configuration. The S801 works ❑ Adjustable from 0%–85%
contactors built into the unit, it reduces with all motors from fractional horse- initial torque
the amount of wiring required during power up to motors requiring 1000 A ❑ 0.5–180 seconds adjustment time
36 installation and offers huge space of steady-state current. The built-in
savings in the panel or enclosure. overload (in ranges from 12 to 1000 A) ■ Current Limit Start:
The product is also designed to be and run bypass contactor makes ❑ Adjustable from 0%–550% FLA
37 small enough to replace an existing installation and setup quick and easy. ❑ 0.5–180 seconds adjustment time
across-the-line starter (NEMA or IEC) The overload also offers some
in the existing enclosure. This allows advanced protective functions to give ■ Soft Stop:
38 customers to upgrade their existing additional motor protection. ❑ Adjustable from 0%–60 seconds
motor control centers and enclosed
control by replacing the starter they With the pump control option, it is the ■ Built-in run bypass contact
39 have today with a soft starter, gaining number one soft starter available for
pumping applications. The unique soft
■ 24 Vdc control
the benefits of lower utility charges, ■ IP20 finger protection
longer component life and less stress stopping control provides a smooth
■ Optional pump control
40 on products and material systems. transition for stopping a motor and
This size benefit allows users to save eliminating the “water-hammer”
the expense of replacing the existing effect that can damage pipes, valves Standards and Certifications
41 structure or adding a new one to and pumps. ■ IEC 947 compliant
house a much larger soft starter. ■ EN 60947-4-2
Features
■ CE marked
42 Application Description ■ Built-in overload protection: ■ CSA certified
The S801 line uses a total of six SCRs ❑ 30%–100% adjustment range
■ UL listed
to control the motor (three matched ❑ Trip Class 5, 10, 20 and 30
43 pairs). The unit has a built-in overload
❑ Jam

Sheet 30 071
S801 Enclosed Soft Starter Features and Benefits ■ System Cost Savings—With
■ Longer Life of System Equipment —
improved reliability, longer life of 22
system equipment, reduced power
With the impressive list of control draw, space savings and improved
and protective functions, this new safety, you enjoy the benefit of a 23
line of products is designed to sig- significant improvement in system
nificantly increase the protection uptime and a reduction in system
it offers to system equipment (e.g., downtime resulting in overall 24
motors, belts, pumps and so on). system cost saving
The benefit of increased system
■ Time Savings—Time savings in
equipment protection is longer
using S801 soft starters are achieved 25
life and longer system equipment
uptime through a quick and easy setup
procedure, user-friendly operational
■ Reduced Power Draw—Power
design, the longer life of system 26
control features like Ramp Start, equipment and improved safety
Enclosed S801 Soft Starter Current Limit Start and Jog Forward
■ Productivity—Overall, S801 soft
provide maximum flexibility in 27
General Description selecting start profiles, minimizing starters significantly improve your
both mechanical and electrical productivity by saving you time and
24 Vdc Control—S801 soft starters
stress while maximizing motor money. This is demonstrated by 28
superiority begins with the control
performance longer product life, longer runs
package that features 24 Vdc control
between breakdowns and the
running a digital signal processor, or ■ Improved Safety—S801 soft
ease of installation and operation 29
DSP, and using a low impedance run starters offer fingerproof deadfront
circuit, all of which contribute to the construction, reducing the chance
S801 soft starter’s safety, advanced of electrical shock. With the use
functionality and compact size. of 24 Vdc control power, pilot Enclosed Control
30
devices and relays can be
Built-in Overload Protection—With ■ UL 508
operated more safely
most wye-delta starters, many of the ■ IEC 947-4-2 31
advanced features of the S801 are ■ EN 60947.2
functions that must be added at the
■ CE marked EMC/LV directives
expense of cost and space. The S801
■ CSA–22.2
32
soft starter, for example, has built-in
overload protection (overloads must
be added to wye-delta starters). So, Schematic Diagram 33
S801 soft starters are more compact,
easier to wire and less costly than their
wye-delta counterparts.
01 L1 L1 T1
T1 34
T2
Reduced Power Consumption—The 02 L2 L2 T2 Motor
T3
S801 soft starter costs less in terms 03 L3 L3 T3
35
of power consumption. An S801 soft IT Soft Start
starter also reduces line brown-outs
and decreases overall energy usage. 36
For example, an S801 soft starter
controls peak power demand while L1 L2 L3
a full-voltage starter can apply
600–800% FLA on startup.
Power Supply
480 Vac–24 Vdc
37
+ + – – Applying Voltages Other Than
24 Vdc to Terminals P Thru 4
Lower Starting Torque—System cost May Cause Serious Damage
savings are significant with an S801 (–) to Soft-Start Control Board 38
soft starter versus a full voltage starter.
With an S801 soft starter, mechanical Terminal Board
components can have longer life or (+)
– 39
+
be reduced in size because of lower
starting torque values (250–500% FLA MX P
current with SSRV).
1
1 40
24V Inputs
2 DC Only
Fewer Mechanical Problems—Because Reset 3
an S801 soft starter reduces stress on 4
4 41
a system by eliminating the jolts and 13
violent speed variations that full-voltage Run
14 Internal 24 Vdc
starters introduce to a process,
Customer 95 Auxiliary or 42
fewer mechanical breakdowns (+) 2 96 Contacts 120 Vac
Control MX 96
occur, improving the quality of Device
+ – 98
the product and process.
(Diode)
Fault 43
Figure 30.5-1. Wiring Diagram

Sheet 30 072
Technical Data and Specifications Table 30.5-7. Standard-Duty Ratings

22 Starting Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient
Base Ratings Method of FLA Seconds Hour Temperature
Table 30.5-8 below is the base ratings for the S801 soft
23 starter. The tables included in this catalog are meant to
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
300%
500%
30
10
3
3
50°C
50°C
be a selection table for different applications, but to vs. Wye-delta 350% 20 3 50°C
match a unit to your exact application, consult with vs. 80% RVAT 480% 20 2 50°C
24 your local Eaton representative or visit our Web site at vs. 65% RVAT 390% 20 3 50°C
vs. 50% RVAT 300% 20. 4 50°C
www.eaton.com/electrical.
25
Table 30.5-8. Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame Maximum Three-Phase Motor Catalog
26 Size Current kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz) Number
230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
27 Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
N 37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S801N37N3S

66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S801N66N3S
28 R 105 30 55 59 30 25 40 30 75 60 100 75 S801R10N3S
135 40 63 80 40 30 50 40 100 75 125 100 S801R13N3S
T 180 51 90 110 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S801T18N3S
29 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801T24N3S
304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801T30N3S
U 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801U36N3S
30 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801U42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801U50N3S 12
V 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801V36N3S
31 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801V42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801V50N3S
650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801V65N3S
720 220 400 450 — — 300 250 600 500 700 600 S801V72N3S
32 850 257 475 500 — — 350 300 700 600 900 700 S801V85N3S
1000 315 560 600 — — 400 350 800 700 1000 800 S801V10N3S
1 15 sec. start, 300% inrush, 40 °C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to 290 mm V-Frame, 500 A starter.
33 2 U-Frame 500 A does not have IEC Certification.
Severe-Duty Ratings Table 30.5-9. Severe-Duty Ratings

34 Motor applications and customer needs come in many Starting Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient
different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating Method of FLA Seconds Hour Temperature
tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what
35 the S801 soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
450%
500%
30
10
4
10
50 °C
50 °C
these categories, you can use these charts. For other applica- vs. Wye-delta 350% 65 3 50 °C
tions, or when a question arises, contact Eaton Corporation vs. 80% RVAT 480% 25 4 50 °C
36 to assist you in selecting the proper soft starter. vs. 65% RVAT 390% 40 4 50 °C
vs. 50% RVAT 300% 60 4 50 °C
37 Table 30.5-10. Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Frame Maximum Three-Phase Motor Catalog
Size Current kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz) Number
38 230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
39 N 22 5.5 10 11 5 5 7-1/2 5 15 10 20 15 S801N37N3S
42 11 18.5 22 10 10 15 10 30 25 40 30 S801N66N3S
R 65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S801R10N3S
40 80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S801R13N3S
T 115 33 59 63 30 30 40 30 75 75 100 100 S801T18N3S
150 45 80 90 50 40 50 50 100 100 150 125 S801T24N3S
41 192 55 100 110 60 50 75 60 150 125 200 150 S801T30N3S
U 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801U36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801U42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801U50N3S 3
42
V 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801V36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801V42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801V50N3S
43 420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S801V65N3S
480 147 257 295 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801V72N3S
525 160 280 335 150 150 200 150 450 350 500 450 S801V85N3S
600 185 315 375 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801V10N3S
3 U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

Sheet 30 073
Features Benefits ■ Elimination of water-hammer,

■ Able to fit in place of existing ■ Reduced wear on belts, gears, which can reduce installed cost of 22
starters chains, clutches, shafts and bearings pipe hangers and extend existing
system life
■ Smallest unit on the market today ■ Allows for controlling the inrush
current to the motor and reducing ■ Less shock to product on conveyor 23
■ Very easy to install, wire and program
electrical charges due to peak lines and material handling gear
■ Reduces initial torque on motor
energy demand ■ 24 Vdc control enhances personnel
and loads
and equipment safety
24
■ Reduced inrush current leads to
■ Able to control the maximum
inrush current more stable power grid and can
lower peak demand charges 25
Table 30.5-11. Technical Data
Soft Starter
(Partial Catalog Number)
S801 S801 S801
N37 N66 R10
S801
R13
S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801
T18 T24 T30
S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801
U36 U42 U50 1 V36 V42 V50 V65 V72 V85 V10
26
Maximum current capacity 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000
Dimensions in Inches (mm) 27
Width 2.60 (66.1) 4.38 (111.3) 7.65 (194.3) 7.73 (196.3) 11.04 (280.4)
Height 7.38 (187.4) 7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.8) 12.72 (323.1) 16.57 (420.9)
Depth 6.63 (168.4) 7.03 (178.6) 6.69 (169.9) 7.08 (179.9) 7.69 (195.3) 28
Weight in lb (kg) 5.80 (2.6) 10.50 (4.8) 48.00 (21.8)— 48.00 (21.8)— 103.00 (46.0)—with lugs
with lugs with lugs 91.00 (41.4)—without lugs
41.00 (18.6) —
without lugs
41.00 (18.6) —
without lugs
29
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan 10 M 30
Insulating voltage (Ui) 660 V
Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds (0.5–360 seconds extended ramp)
Resistance to vibration
Resistance to shock
3g
15g
31
Electrical Information
Operating voltage
Operating frequency
200–600 V
47–63 Hz
32
Overload setting 30%–100%
Trip class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)
33
Number of conductors 1 1 1 or 2 — — — 2, 4 or 6
Wire sizes
Type of connectors
14–2
Box lug
14–4/0
Box lug
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
34
Control Wiring (12-Pin)
Wire sizes in AWG 22–14 35
Number of conductors (stranded) 2 (or one AWG 12)
Torque requirements in lb-in. 3.5
Solid, stranded or flexible 3.31
maximum size in mm2 36
Control Power Requirements
Voltage range (24 V ± 10%)
Steady state current amperes
21.6–26.4
1.0
— — — 21.6–26.4
1.4
37
Inrush current amperes 10 10
Ripple 1% 1%
Relays (1) Class A and C
38
Voltage AC—maximum 240
Voltage DC—maximum 120
Amperes—maximum 3 39
Environment
Temperature—operating
Temperature—storage
–30 ºC to +50 ºC (no derating) consult factory for operation >50 ºC
–50 ºC to +70 ºC
40
Altitude <2000 m—consult factory for operation >2000 m
Humidity <95% noncondensing
Operating position Any 41
Pollution degree (IEC 947-1) 3
Impulse withstand voltage 4000 V
1
(IEC 947-4-1)
42
U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.
43

Solid-State Starters January 2018
Sheet 30 074
22 S811 Solid-State Reduced stopping a motor and eliminating Advanced communication configura-
the “water-hammer” effect that can tion settings provide the system
Voltage Soft Starters damage pipes, valves and pumps. integrator with powerful tools to
facilitate system optimization.
23 The S811 offers an impressive array of
advanced protective features. Not only Features and Benefits
are the protective features selectable,
■ The DIM provides an intuitive,
24 but many offer variable settings allow-
easy-to-use human interface with
ing the user to fine-tune the starter to
meet specific system requirements. powerful configuration capabilities
to maximize system performance
25 The S811 has an easy to use Digital ■ Door or device mounted DIM
Interface Module (DIM) that allows the enables users to safely configure,
user to configure the device and to
26 read system parameters. The DIM
commission, monitor and trouble-
shoot the system at the electrical
includes an LCD display and keypad to panel without opening the
scroll through the various menus. The
27 DIM allows the user to modify control
enclosure door
S811 Soft Starter ■ System operating parameters
parameters, enable or disable protec-
tions, set communication variables, can be monitored enterprise-wide
28 General Description monitor system parameters such as through a communications network.
line voltages and currents, and access Increase uptime by providing data
The S811 from Eaton offers all the
the fault queue. for process management and
popular features of the S801, but adds
29 enhanced functionality with the new
preventive diagnostics
DIM (Digital Interface Module) and ■ Run bypass mode greatly reduces
communications capabilities. internal heating created by the
30 ONLN SS OXFDO1 H STOP greater power dissipation in
The S811 reduced voltage soft starter Monitoring the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
is very compact, multi-functional, connects the motor to the line and
31 easy to install and easy to program. PREV NEXT ENTER
improves system efficiency by
Designed to control the acceleration reducing internal power losses
and deceleration of three-phase ■ Internal solid-state overload
32 motors up to 690 V, the line is available protection provides accurate cur-
from 11 A through 1000 A. rent measurement and trip settings.
33 The S811 is designed to be a complete
ESC Sophisticated algorithms solve
package combining the SCRs, bypass a series of differential equations
contactor and overload in one, very that model true motor heating and
34 compact unit. The S811 is available Figure 30.5-2. Digital Interface Module (DIM) cooling, resulting in superior motor
as a component for panel mounting, overload protection while minimizing
The DIM can be removed from the nuisance trips. Advanced selectable
in motor control centers or in enclosed S811 and remote mounted. Kits are
35 control (NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 7/9 available to door mount the DIM,
protective features safeguard the
motor and system against a variety
and 12). enabling users to safely configure, of system faults
commission, monitor and trouble-
36 Application Description shoot the system at the electrical panel ■ Internal run bypass contactors and
overload protection eliminate the
Designed to control the acceleration without opening the enclosure door.
need for additional devices, reducing
and deceleration of three-phase
37 motors, the S811 soft starter uses
The S811 has built-in communications enclosure sizes, minimizing installa-
capabilities that enable the soft starter tion and wiring time and reducing
silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) to overall assembly size and cost
to be connected to a variety of
control the voltage to soft start and
38 soft stop the motor. After the motor is
networks, including DeviceNet™, ■ Wide range of overload FLA settings
Ethernet, Modbus®and PROFIBUS. (31–100% of rated current) and a
started, internal run bypass contactors
Multiple control components can be selectable trip class (5–30) offers
close, resulting in the motor running
39 directly across-the-line. The built-in
connected to one Eaton gateway that users the flexibility to fine-tune the
concentrates data from the devices starter to match specific application
solid-state overload protects the motor requirements
into a single node. Configuration is
from overload conditions with sophis-
40 ticated algorithms that model true
simple—a single press of the gateway’s
Auto Configuration button sets the
motor heating, resulting in better
system up for default operation.
41 motor protection and fewer nuisance
This automatically configures the I/O
trips. Advanced protective and
assemblies to the system devices.
diagnostic features reduce downtime.
42 A voltage ramp start or current limit
The data from these devices are then
assembled into a single input and
start is available. Kick start is available
output messages.
in either starting mode. The soft stop
43 option allows for a ramp stop time that The S811 communication parameters
is longer than the coast to stop time. can be configured with the DIM or
The pump control option provides a through the network using CH Studio
smooth transition for starting and Component Manager.

January 2018 Solid-State Starters
Sheet 30 075
■ Variable ramp times and torque damaged by repeated overload trip, motor did not get to the rated speed in
control settings provide unlimited reset and re-start cycles. the defined soft start period. A current 22
starting configurations, allowing for greater than 200% FLA at the end of
maximum application flexibility The thermal memory value can be the soft start period will cause the
■ Kick-start feature enables soft
monitored through the DIM or the starter to trip on a stall fault. 23
starting of high friction loads communications network. The thermal
memory value can be of great use in Pole Over Temperature
■ Soft stop control for applications
where an abrupt stop of the load
determining an impending overload High ambient temperatures, extended 24
trip condition. Alarms can be imple- ramp times and high duty cycle condi-
is not acceptable mented in the process monitoring tions may cause the S811 power pole
■ Pump control option with sophisti-
cated pump algorithms on both
system warning of an impending conductors to reach a temperature that 25
trip before a trip occurs halting the exceeds their thermal rating. The S811
starting and stopping that minimize process. Costly system downtime
the pressure surges that cause is equipped with sensors that monitor
water hammer. The pump control
can be avoided. the temperature of the power poles. 26
option will maximize the life of the The trip current is adjusted to match Over temperature protection occurs
pump and piping systems while the specific application requirements if the device’s thermal capacity is
minimizing the downtime caused by entering the motor nameplate full exceeded. The soft starter will trip 27
by system failure load current rating and trip class. The in over temperature conditions,
FLA adjustment includes a 3 to 1 preventing device failure.
■ Six SCRs control all three motor
phases, providing smooth accelera- adjustment range. The overload trip
28
The device pole temperature value
tion and deceleration performance class is adjustable from class 5 can be monitored through the DIM or
through class 30. The overload is
■ Soft acceleration and deceleration
ambient temperature compensated—
the communications network. This 29
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, feature can be of use in determining
clutches, shafts and bearings meaning its trip characteristics will an impending over temperature trip
not vary with changes in ambient
■ Reduce the peak inrush current
temperature. The overload protection
condition. Alarms can be implemented 30
stress on the power system in the process monitoring system
can be enabled, disabled, or disabled warning of an impending trip before a
■ Minimize peak starting torque to
on start.
diminish mechanical system wear trip occurs, halting the process. Costly 31
and damage Short Circuit system shutdown can be avoided.
■ 24 Vdc control module enhances The use of a short-circuit protective Phase Loss
personnel and equipment safety. device in coordination with the S811
32
Loss of a phase can cause a significant
■ Removable, lockable control terminal is required in branch motor circuits increase in the current drawn in the
block reduces maintenance costs. by most electrical codes. Short-circuit
Also provides the opportunity for coordination ratings with both fuses
remaining two phases. Phase loss 33
can lead to motor damage before an
OEMs to reduce assembly and and Eaton’s molded case circuit eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
test costs by using pre-assembled breakers are available providing
wire harnesses customers with design flexibility. The
loss is typically an indication of a 34
failure in the electrical distribution
S811 has short circuit coordination system. The S811 will detect a phase
Protective Features ratings as an open component, an
enclosed starter, and in a motor
loss and trip if any phase current drops 35
All protective features can be below a preset value. The phase loss
configured, enabled or disabled control center. trip level is adjustable from 0% to
with the DIM or through the
Jam 100% of the average of the other two 36
communications network. phase levels with an adjustable trip
Excessive current and torque up to delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Motor Overload locked rotor levels can occur in a jam
The S811 includes electronic overload condition. The condition can result in Phase Imbalance
37
protection as standard. The overload stress and damage to the motor, load, Phase current or voltage imbalance
meets applicable requirements for a mechanical system, and the electrical
motor overload protective device. The distribution system. Jam protection
can cause a significant increase in the 38
current drawn in the remaining two
overload protects the motor from over prevents the stress and damage from a phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
heat conditions with the use of sophisti- jam during normal run. After the
cated algorithms that model true motor motor is started, a current greater than
motor damage before an eventual 39
overload trip. Phase imbalance is
heating, resulting in superior motor 300% FLA setting will cause the starter typically an indication of a failure in
protection and fewer nuisance trips. to trip on a jam fault. the electrical distribution system or 40
The S811 calculates a thermal memory Stall the motor. The S811 will detect both
value. A 100% value represents the current and voltage phase imbalances
Excessive current and torque up to
maximum safe temperature of the locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
and trip if any phase becomes 41
motor. When the thermal memory imbalanced as compared to the
condition. The condition can lead to an average of the other two phases.
value reaches 100%, an overload trip overload trip and result in stress and
will occur removing power to the damage to the motor, load, mechanical The phase current imbalance trip level
42
motor. Upon trip, the S811 stores the system, and the electrical distribution is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the
calculated motor heating value and system. Stall protection prevents average of the current in the other two
will not allow a motor re-start until the stress and damage to a motor that has phases with an adjustable trip delay of
43
motor has sufficiently cooled. This not come up to speed, or stalled after 0.1 to 60 seconds.
feature ensures the motor will not be the soft start time. The S811 will trip to
protect the system in the event that the

Sheet 30 076
The phase voltage imbalance trip level High Voltage Average line current as a % FLA
22 is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the High voltage conditions can result from Provides the average rms line
average of the voltage in the other two disturbances in the electrical power current as a percentage of the S811
phases with an adjustable trip delay of distribution system. High voltage FLA setting.
23 0.1 to 60 seconds. conditions can cause malfunctions
or failures of electrical equipment. Three-Phase Line Currents
Reset Mode
The S811 has high voltage protection Provides three rms phase line currents
24 The S811 can be set up for automatic that will trip if the average rms voltage in amps, accurate to within 2%.
or manual reset on trip. The manual is greater than a preset value. The high Imbalances or changes in the relative
reset mode requires the operator to voltage protection can be programmed phase current to one another can
25 physically press the RESET button as a percent of nominal voltage from indicate anomalies in the motor or
located on the soft starter. The over- 101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.1 to electrical distribution system.
load can be manually reset through 60 seconds.
26 the DIM or through the communica- Three-Phase Pole Currents
tions network. The overload can also Monitoring Capabilities Provides three rms phase pole
be electrically reset by energizing currents in amps, accurate to within
27 a 24 Vdc input on the control The S811 has an impressive array of 2%. The pole current is the current
terminal block. system monitoring capabilities that through the soft starter. The line and
allow users to access real time process pole current will be identical in in-line
28 The automatic reset mode allows the and diagnostic data. This data can be
applications, and will differ in inside-
soft starter to be automatically reset as viewed at the device with the DIM or
the-delta applications.
soon as the trip condition is no longer through a communications network.
29 present. With the automatic reset Data over a communications network Three-Phase Line Voltages
mode, after the fault is no longer pres- can provide valuable insight into the
Provides the individual rms three-
ent, the motor will be restarted as soon condition of the equipment and pro-
phase line voltages. Imbalances or
30 as a valid start signal is present. cesses. Maintenance and production
personnel can monitor critical opera-
changes in the relative phase voltage
Phase Reversal to one another can indicate anomalies
tional and maintenance data from a
in the motor or electrical distribution
31 The S811 can determine if the proper central control station that can be
located far away from the production system. Voltage can be used to
line phase sequence is present by
facility. Process data can be monitored monitor electrical distribution system
default. The device will trip if the line
to determine system anomalies that performance. Warnings, alarms and
32 phase sequence is something other
may indicate a need for preventive system actions to low or high voltage
than A-B-C. The S811 can be config-
maintenance or an impeding failure. conditions can be implemented.
ured to operate under reversed
Adjustments made through the com-
33 phase conditions (A-C-B).
munications network can reduce costs
Percent Thermal Memory
Shorted SCR Detection by minimizing the time traveling to the Provides the real time calculated
location where the motor controls are thermal memory value. The S811
34 The S811 monitors the operation of the
located. When faults do occur, real calculates thermal memory value. A
power poles and will trip under a
time fault data can assist maintenance 100% value represents the maximum
shorted SCR condition.
in troubleshooting and planning repair safe temperature of the motor. When
35 Open SCR Detection resources. Remote reset signals can the thermal memory value reaches
The S811 monitors the operation of the be given to tripped devices without 100%, an overload trip will occur,
power poles and will trip under an the need for manual intervention by removing power to the motor.
36 open SCR condition. maintenance personnel.
The thermal memory value can be of
Low Current Average Line Current great use in determining an impending
37 Low current conditions can be a result Provides the average of the three- overload trip condition. Alarms can be
phase rms line currents in amps, implemented in the process monitor-
of a loss of load or a failure in the ing system warning of an impending
mechanical system. The S811 has low accurate to within 2%. Current data
38 current protection that will trip if the can be used to indicate a need for trip before a trip occurs, halting the
maintenance. Increased currents in process. Costly system downtime can
average rms current falls below a be avoided.
preset value. The low current protec- a fixed load application can indicate
39 tion can be programmed as a percent a reduction in system efficiencies DC Control Voltage
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%. and performance, signifying system
maintenance is due. Monitors level of the 24 Vdc control
40 Low Voltage voltage. Fluctuations in control voltage
Average Pole Current can cause component malfunction and
Low voltage conditions can result from failure. System control voltage data
disturbances in the electrical power Provides the average of the three-
41 distribution system. Low voltage phase rms pole currents in amps, can be used to implement warnings,
accurate to within 2%. The pole alarms and system actions to low or
conditions can cause a malfunction high voltage conditions.
and damage to electrical equipment. current is the current through the
42 The S811 has low voltage protection soft starter. The line and pole current
that will trip if the average rms will be identical in in-line applications,
voltage falls below a preset value. and will differ in inside-the-delta
43 The low voltage protection can be applications.
programmed as a percent of nominal
voltage from 1% to 99% with a
trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.

Sheet 30 077
Pole Temperature Breaker Status

Increases in pole temperature are The S811 has provisions to read and 22
caused by increases in ambient display circuit breaker status. Eaton
temperature, start/stop times and communicating cover control or
start duty cycles. Changes in pole other communicating protective 23
temperatures represent a change device is required to take advantage
in system operating conditions. of this feature.
Identifying unexpected operating 24
conditions or changes can prompt User Manual
maintenance and aid in process Surge Suppressor
evaluation activities.
A comprehensive user manual is avail- 25
able and can be downloaded free of
Device Temperature charge from www.eaton.com/electri-
An increase in device temperature is
cal by performing a document search 26
for MN03902002E.
a strong indication of an increase in
ambient temperature. High ambient
temperature operation can be identi-
Accessories 27
fied with the device temperature data. Surge Suppressors
Ambient temperature increases can be
due to loss of enclosure cooling fans A surge suppressor can mount on 28
or blocked venting. High ambient either the line or load side of the
temperatures will reduce the life of all S811 soft starter. It is designed to Surge Suppressor Mounted on
electrical equipment in the enclosure. clip the line voltage (or load side a 200 mm Device 29
induced voltage).
Start Count Table 30.5-12. Surge Suppressors
Start count data can be used to Description Catalog 30
monitor system output, schedule Number
preventative maintenance, identify
system anomalies and identify
600 V MOV for 65 mm
and 110 mm units
EMS38 31
changes in system operation. 600 V MOV for 200 mm and EMS39
290 mm units
Diagnostics 690 V MOV for 200 mm and EMS41
32
290 mm units
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue Catalog Number Selection
33
containing the last nine system
Table 30.5-13. S811 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
faults can be read through the DIM
or communications network. Fault
34
identification can minimize trouble- S 811 T 30 N 3 S
shooting time and cost. The fault
queue can be remotely accessed
35
S = Soft starter
through a communications network S = Standard soft starter
to assist in planning maintenance (configurable for edge 36
811 = Non-combination Soft Starter
resources. Thirty different faults or level control)
can be identified by the S811. D = Inside-the-delta
Frame Size L = Extended ramp start
Control Status N = 65 mm
W = Without DIM 37
The S811 provides data that represents R = 110 mm
system conditions that can be read T = 200 mm 3 = Three-pole device
through the DIM or the communica- U = 200 mm 38
V = 290 mm
tions network. This data identifies the N = No options
status of the system and the control P = Pump control
commands the system is requesting Ampacity Rating V = 690 V option 39
of the S811. This can be used for 37 = 37 A 36 = 360 A (Frame T18 through V85) 2
advanced troubleshooting and 66 = 66 A 42 = 420 A
system integration activities. 10 = 105 A 50 = 500 A 1
40
13 = 135 A 65 = 650 A
18 = 180 A 72 = 720 A
24 = 240 A 85 = 850 A 41
30 = 304 A 10 = 1000 A
1 U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification. 42

2 Not available in U-Frame.
43

Sheet 30 078
Operation
22
Starting and Stopping Modes
Locked Rotor Torque

The S811 has a variety of starting and 100%
23 stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
applications. The motor can be started Run (FLA)
24 in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current Initial
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft Torque
Stop are available within both starting
25 modes.
Time (Seconds)
Voltage Ramp Start
26 Provides a voltage ramp to the motor Figure 30.5-3. Starting Characteristics—Ramp Start
resulting in a constant torque increase.
The most commonly used form of soft
27 start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
duration of the ramp to full voltage Max.
28 conditions. Bypass contactors close
Allowed
Current
after ramp time.

Run
29 ■ Adjustable initial torque 0–85% 100%
FLA
of locked rotor torque
■ Adjustable ramp time 0.5–180
30 seconds (can be extended with
factory modification) Time (Seconds)
31 Current Limit Start

Figure 30.5-4. Starting Characteristics—Current Limit Start
Limits the maximum current available
to the motor during the start phase.
32 This mode of soft starting is used 100%
when it becomes necessary to limit the
maximum starting current due to long
33 start times or to protect the motor. This
Locked Rotor Torque
start mode allows you to set the maxi-

mum starting current as a percentage
34 of locked rotor current and the dura-
tion of the current limit. Bypass con-
tactors close after current limit time.
35 Run (FLA)
■ Maximum current of 0–85% locked
rotor current
36 ■ Adjustable ramp time 0.5–180
seconds (can be extended with
Kick
factory modification) Start Ramp
37 Time (Seconds)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage
38 Figure 30.5-5. Starting Characteristics—Kick Start
Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
modes. Provides a current and torque
“kick” for 0 to 2.0 seconds. This
39 provides greater initial current to
Run
develop additional torque to break-
away a high friction load.
40
■ 0–85% of locked rotor torque
■ 0–2.0 seconds duration
41
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a
42 load. Used when a stop-time that is Ramp
greater than the coast-to-stop time is
desired. Often used with high friction Time (Seconds)
43 loads where a sudden stop may cause
system or load damage. Figure 30.5-6. Starting Characteristics—Soft Stop
■ Stop time = 0–60 seconds

Sheet 30 079
Product Selection starter is capable of. If the application

Motor applications and customer needs
falls under these categories, you can 22
use these charts. For other applica-
come in many different varieties. With tions, or when a question arises,
the standard and severe duty rating consult with your local Eaton 23
tables, we have attempted to provide Representative or call our Technical
guidelines on what the S811 soft Resource Center at (877) ETN-CARE.
24
Table 30.5-14. Standard-Duty Ratings
Starting Ramp Current Ramp Time Starts Ambient
Method % of FLA Seconds per Hour Temperature 25
vs. Soft start 300% 30 sec. 3 50 °C
vs. Full voltage 500% 10 sec. 3 50 °C
vs. Wye-delta 350% 20 sec. 3 50 °C 26
vs. 80% RVAT 480% 20 sec. 2 50 °C
vs. 65% RVAT 390% 20 sec. 3 50 °C
vs. 50% RVAT 300% 20 sec. 4 50 °C 27
Table 30.5-15. Product Selection—Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame Max. Three-Phase Motor Catalog 28
Size Current Number
kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)
230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
29
N 37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S811N37N3S
66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S811N66N3S 30
R 105 30 55 59 30 25 40 30 75 60 100 75 S811R10N3S
135 40 63 80 40 30 50 40 100 75 125 100 S811R13N3S
T 180 51 90 110 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S811T18N3S 31
240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811T24N3S
304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811T30N3S
U 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811U36N3S 32
420 120 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S811U42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811U50N3S 1
V 360
420
110
129
185
220
220
257
125
150
100
125
150
175
125
150
300
350
250
300
350
450
300
350
S811V36N3S
S811V42N3S
33
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811V50N3S
650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811V65N3S
720 220 400 450 — — 300 250 600 500 700 600 S811V72N3S 34
850 257 475 500 — — 350 300 700 600 900 700 S811V85N3S
1000 315 560 600 — — 400 350 800 700 1000 800 S811V10N3S
1 500 A rating does not have IEC Certification. 35
Table 30.5-16. Severe-Duty Ratings
Starting Ramp Current Ramp Time Starts Ambient 36
Method % of FLA Seconds per Hour Temperature
vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage
450%
500%
30 sec.
10 sec.
4
10
50 °C
50 °C
37
vs. Wye-delta 350% 65 sec. 3 50 °C
vs. 80% RVAT 480% 25 sec. 4 50 °C
vs. 65% RVAT 390% 40 sec. 4 50 °C 38
vs. 50% RVAT 300% 60 sec. 4 50 °C
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 080
Table 30.5-17. Product Selection—Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

22 Frame Maximum Three-Phase Motor Catalog
Size Current Number
kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)
23 230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

N 22 5.5 10 11 5 5 7-1/2 5 15 10 20 15 S811N37N3S

24 42 11 18.5 22 10 10 15 10 30 25 40 30 S811N66N3S
R 65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S811R10N3S
80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S811R13N3S
25 T 115 33 59 63 30 30 40 30 75 75 100 100 S811T18N3S
150 45 80 90 50 40 50 50 100 100 150 125 S811T24N3S
192 55 100 110 60 50 75 60 150 125 200 150 S811T30N3S
26 U 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811U36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811U42N3S
V 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811V36N3S
27 305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811V42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811V50N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S811V65N3S
28 480
525
147
160
257
280
295
335
150
150
150
150
200
200
150
150
400
450
350
350
500
500
450
450
S811V72N3S
S811V85N3S
600 185 315 375 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811V10N3S
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 081

Table 30.5-18. Specifications—S811 Soft Starter
22
Soft Starter S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 S811
(Partial Catalog Number) N37 N66 R10 R13 T18 T24 T30 U36 U42 U50 1 V36 V42 V50 V65 V72 V85 V10 2 23
Maximum current capacity 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000
FLA range 11– 20– 32– 42– 56– 75– 95– 112– 131 – 156 – 112 – 131– 156– 203– 225– 265– 320–
37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 580 1000 24
Dimensions
Width in inches (mm) 2.66 (67.6) 4.42 (112.2) 7.67 (194.8) 7.73 (196.3) 11.05 (280.6) 25
Height in inches (mm) 7.38 (187.4) 7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.9) 12.72 (323.1) 16.57 (420.8)
Depth in inches (mm) 6.48 (164.5) 6.64 (168.7) 6.39 (162.4) 7.08 (179.9) 7.35 (186.6)
Weight in lb (kg) 5.80 (2.6) 10.50 (4.8) 48.00 (21.8) with lugs 48.00 (21.8) with lugs 103.00 (46.8) with lugs 26
41.00 (18.6) without lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs 91.00 (41.4) without lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical 10 million
27
lifespan
Insulating voltage Ui 660 V
28
Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds (0.5–360 seconds extended ramp)
Resistance to vibration 3g
Resistance to shock 15g 29
Electrical Information
Operating voltage 200–600 V
Operating frequency 47–63 Hz
30
Overload setting 30–100%
Trip class 5, 10, 20 and 30 31
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)
Number of conductors One One One or two — — — Two, four or six
Wire sizes 14–2 14–4/0 4 AWG to 500 kcmil — — — 2/0 to 500 kcmil
32
Type of connectors Box lug Add-on lug kit
Control Wiring (12-Pin) 33
Wire sizes in AWG 22–14
Number of conductors Two
(stranded) (or one AWG 12) 34
Torque requirements 3.5
in lb-in
Solid, stranded or flexible 3.31 35
maximum size in mm2
Control Power Requirements
Voltage range (24 V ± 10%) 21.6–26.4
36
Steady state current amps 1.0 1.0 1.0 — — — 1.4
Inrush current amps 10 10 10 — — — 10 37
Ripple 1%
38
Amperes—maximum 3 39
Environment
Temperature—operating –30 °C to +50 °C (no derating) consult factory for operation > +50 °C
Temperature—storage –50 °C to +70 °C
40
Altitude <2000m—consult factory for operation > 2000m
Humidity <95% noncondensing 41
Operating position Any
Pollution degree IEC 947-1 3
Impulse withstand voltage 6000 V 42
IEC 947-4-1
1 U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.
2 UR Recognized Product. 43

Sheet 30 082
S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter
22 S611 Solid-State Reduced Application Description

Voltage Soft Starter Designed to control the acceleration
and deceleration of three-phase
23 motors, the S611 soft starter uses
silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs)
to control the voltage to soft start and
24 soft stop the motor. After the motor is
started, internal run bypass contactors
close, resulting in the motor running
25 directly across-the-line. The built-in
solid-state overload protects the
motor from overload conditions with
26 sophisticated algorithms that model Figure 30.5-7. User Interface
true motor heating, resulting in better
motor protection and fewer nuisance The UI can be removed from the
27 trips. Advanced protective and S611 and be remote mounted. Kits
diagnostic features reduce downtime. are available to door mount the UI,
enabling users to safely configure,
A voltage ramp start or current limit commission, monitor and trouble-
28 S611 Solid-State Soft Starter
start is available. Kick start is available shoot the system at the electrical panel
in either starting mode. The soft stop without opening the enclosure door.
General Description option allows for a ramp stop time that
29 Eaton revolutionized the reduced is longer than the coast to stop time.
This will help eliminate the possibility
of an arc flash incident.
voltage control marketplace with its
advanced feature set and user-friendly The pump control option provides Communications
30 user interface module to enhance a smooth transition for starting and
The S611 has built-in communication
system performance and to reduce stopping a motor and for eliminating
capabilities through two communica-
commissioning times. The S611 adds the “water-hammer” effect that can
31 tions ports to connect the soft starter
enhanced functionality with network damage pipes, valves and pumps.
to a variety of networks, including
communications, metering, monitor- The S611 offers an impressive array of Modbus (native), DeviceNet™ and
ing and diagnostics capabilities. PROFIBUS.
32 advanced protective features. Not only
The Eaton line of S611 reduced voltage are the protective features selectable,
The S611 communication parameters
soft starters is multi-functional, easy to but many offer variable settings allow-
can be configured with the UI.
33 install and easy to program. Designed ing the user to fine-tune the starter to
Advanced communication configura-
to control the acceleration and deceler- meet specific system requirements.
tion settings provide the system
ation of three-phase motors up to The S611 has an easy-to-use user integrator with powerful tools to
34 600 V, the line is available from 26 to interface module (UI) that allows the facilitate system optimization.
414 A. user to configure the device and to read
system parameters. The UI includes
35 The S611 is designed to be a complete
an LED display and a keypad to scroll
package, combining the SCRs,
bypass contactor and overload in through the various parameters. The
UI allows the user to modify control
36 one compact unit.
parameters, enable or disable protec-
tions, set communication variables,
monitor system parameters such as
37 line voltages and currents, and access
the fault queue.
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 083
■ Internal run bypass contactors

and overload protection eliminate 22
the need for additional devices,
reducing enclosure sizes, minimiz-
ing installation and wiring time, 23
and reducing overall assembly
size and cost
■ Wide range of overload FLA settings 24
(50–100% of rated frame current)
and a selectable trip class (5–30)
offers users the flexibility to fine- 25
tune the starter to match specific
application requirements
■ Variable ramp times and torque
26
control settings provide unlimited
starting configurations, allowing for 27
maximum application flexibility
■ Kick-start feature enables soft
starting of high friction loads 28
■ Soft stop control for applications
where an abrupt stop of the load
is not acceptable 29
■ Pump control option with sophisti-
cated pump algorithms on both
starting and stopping that minimize 30
the pressure surges that cause
water hammer. The pump control
option will maximize the life of the 31
pump and piping systems while
minimizing the downtime caused
by system failure 32
Figure 30.5-8. Control Wiring Diagram
■ Six SCRs control all three motor
Table 30.5-19. Network Communications Reference phases, providing smooth accelera- 33
Description Style Catalog
tion and deceleration performance
Number Number ■ Soft acceleration and deceleration
Modbus communication adapter without I/O 3-2372-001A C441M
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, 34
clutches, shafts and bearings
Modbus communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O 3-2372-003B C441N
Modbus communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O 3-2372-004B C441P ■ Reduce the peak inrush current’s
DeviceNet communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O 3-2372-001B C441K stress on the power system 35
DeviceNet communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O 3-2372-002B C441L ■ Minimize peak starting torque to
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O 3-2398-001B C441S diminish mechanical system wear
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O 3-2398-002B C441Q
and damage 36
■ ■ 120 Vac control voltage enhances
Features and Benefits Run Bypass mode greatly reduces
ease of connections
■ The UI (user interface module)
internal heating created by the 37
greater power dissipation in the Protective Features
provides an intuitive, easy-to-use SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
human interface with powerful All protective features can be
configuration capabilities to
connects the motor to the line and
configured, enabled or disabled
38
improves system efficiency by
maximize system performance with the UI or through the
reducing internal power losses
communications network.
■ Door or device mounted UI enables
■ Internal solid-state overload 39
users to safely configure, commis- protection provides accurate
sion, monitor and troubleshoot current measurement and trip
the system at the electrical panel settings. Sophisticated algorithms 40
without opening the enclosure solve a series of differential
door, eliminating the possibility equations that model true motor
of an arc flash incident heating and cooling, resulting in 41
■ System operating parameters superior motor overload protection
can be monitored enterprise-wide while minimizing nuisance trips.
through a communications network. Advanced selectable protective 42
Increase uptime by providing data features safeguard the motor
for process management and and system against a variety of
preventive diagnostics system faults 43

Sheet 30 084
Motor Overload Jam Phase Loss

22 The S611 includes electronic overload Excessive current and torque up to Loss of a phase can cause a significant
protection as standard. The overload locked rotor levels can occur in a jam increase in the current drawn in the
meets applicable requirements for a condition. The condition can result in remaining two phases. Phase loss
23 motor overload protective device. stress and damage to the motor, load, can lead to motor damage before an
The overload protects the motor from mechanical system and the electrical eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
overheat conditions with the use of distribution system. Jam protection loss is typically an indication of a
24 sophisticated algorithms that model prevents the stress and damage from a failure in the electrical distribution
true motor heating, resulting in jam during normal run. After the system. The S611 will detect a phase
superior motor protection and fewer motor is started, a current greater than loss and trip if any phase current drops
25 nuisance trips. 300% FLA setting will cause the starter below a preset value. The phase loss
to trip on a jam fault. trip level is adjustable from 0% to
The S611 calculates a thermal memory 100% of the average of the other two
26 value. A 100% value represents the Stall phase levels with an adjustable trip
maximum safe temperature of the Excessive current and torque up to delay of 0.1–60 seconds.
motor. When the thermal memory locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
27 value reaches 100%, an overload trip condition. The condition can lead to Phase Imbalance
will occur removing power to the an overload trip and can result in Phase current or voltage imbalance
motor. Upon trip, the S611 stores the stress and damage to the motor, load, can cause a significant increase in the
28 calculated motor heating value and mechanical system and the electrical current drawn in the remaining two
will not allow a motor re-start until distribution system. Stall protection phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
the motor has sufficiently cooled. This prevents stress and damage to a motor damage before an eventual
29 feature ensures the motor will not be motor that has not come up to speed, overload trip. Phase imbalance is
damaged by repeated overload trip, or stalled after the soft start time. The typically an indication of a failure in
reset and re-start cycles. S611 will trip to protect the system in the electrical distribution system or
30 the event that the motor did not get the motor. The S611 will detect both
The thermal memory value can be
monitored through the UI or the to the rated speed in the defined soft current and voltage phase imbalances
start period. A current greater than and trip if any phase becomes
31 communications network. The thermal
200% FLA at the end of the soft start imbalanced as compared to the
memory value can be of great use in
determining an impending overload period will cause the starter to trip on a average of the other two phases.
stall fault.
32 trip condition. Alarms can be imple- The phase current imbalance trip level
mented in the process monitoring Pole Over Temperature is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the
system warning of an impending average of the current in the other two
High ambient temperatures, extended
33 trip before a trip occurs halting the
ramp times and high duty cycle condi- phases with an adjustable trip delay of
process. Costly system downtime 0.1–60 seconds.
tions may cause the S611 power pole
can be avoided.
conductors to reach a temperature that
34 The trip current is adjusted to match exceeds their thermal rating. The S611
The phase voltage imbalance trip level
is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the
the specific application requirements is equipped with sensors that monitor average of the voltage in the other two
by entering the motor nameplate full the temperature of the power poles.
35 load current rating and trip class. The Overtemperature protection occurs
phases with an adjustable trip delay of
0.1–60 seconds.
FLA adjustment includes a 2 to 1 if the device’s thermal capacity is
adjustment range. The overload trip exceeded. The soft starter will trip Reset Mode
36 class is adjustable from class 5 in overtemperature conditions, The S611 can be set up for automatic
through class 30. The overload is preventing device failure. or manual reset on trip. The manual
37 ambient temperature compensated— reset mode requires the operator to
The device pole temperature value
meaning its trip characteristics will not physically press the RESET button
can be monitored through the UI or
vary with changes in ambient tempera- located on the soft starter. The
the communications network. This
38 ture. The overload protection can be overload can be manually reset
feature can be of use in determining
enabled, disabled, or disabled on start. through the UI or through the
an impending overtemperature trip
condition. Alarms can be implemented communications network.
Short Circuit
39 The use of a short-circuit protective in the process monitoring system The automatic reset mode allows the
device in coordination with the S611 warning of an impending trip before a soft starter to be automatically reset as
is required in branch motor circuits trip occurs, halting the process. Costly soon as the trip condition is no longer
40 by most electrical codes. Short-circuit system shutdown can be avoided. present. With the automatic reset
coordination ratings with both fuses mode, after the fault is no longer
and Eaton molded-case circuit breakers present, the motor will be restarted as
41 are available providing customers with soon as a valid start signal is present.
design flexibility. The S611 has short-
42 circuit coordination ratings as an open
component, an enclosed starter, and in
a motor control center.
43

Sheet 30 085
Phase Reversal Monitoring Capabilities Three-Phase Pole Currents

The S611 can determine if the proper The S611 has an impressive array of Provides three rms phase pole currents 22
line phase sequence is present by system monitoring capabilities that in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The
default. The device will trip if the line allow users to access real-time process pole current is the current through the
phase sequence is something other and diagnostic data. This data can be soft starter. The line and pole current 23
than A-B-C. The S611 can be config- viewed at the device with the UI or will be identical in in-line applications.
ured to operate under reversed phase through a communications network.
conditions (A-C-B). Data over a communications network Three-Phase Line Voltages 24
can provide valuable insight into the Provides the individual rms three-
Shorted SCR Detection condition of the equipment and phase line voltages. Imbalances or
The S611 monitors the operation of the processes. Maintenance and produc- changes in the relative phase voltage 25
power poles and will trip under a tion personnel can monitor critical to one another can indicate anomalies
shorted SCR condition. operational and maintenance data from in the motor or the electrical distribu-
a central control station that can be tion system. Voltage can be used to 26
Open SCR Detection located far away from the production monitor electrical distribution
The S611 monitors the operation of the facility. Process data can be monitored system performance.
power poles and will trip under an to determine system anomalies that 27
open SCR condition. Warnings, alarms and system actions
may indicate a need for preventive
to low or high voltage conditions can
maintenance or an impeding failure.
Low Current be implemented. 28
Low current conditions can be a result Adjustments made through the
communications network can reduce Percent Thermal Memory
of a loss of load or a failure in the
mechanical system. The S611 has low costs by minimizing the time traveling Provides the real-time calculated 29
current protection that will trip if the to the location where the motor controls thermal memory value. The S611
average rms current falls below a are located. When faults do occur, real- calculates thermal memory value. A
preset value. The low current protec- time fault data can assist maintenance 100% value represents the maximum 30
tion can be programmed as a percent in troubleshooting and planning repair safe temperature of the motor. When
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%. resources. Remote reset signals can be the thermal memory value reaches
given to tripped devices without the 100%, an overload trip will occur, 31
Low Voltage need for manual intervention by removing power to the motor.
Low voltage conditions can result from maintenance personnel. The thermal memory value can be of 32
disturbances in the electrical power
Average Line Current great use in determining an impending
distribution system. Low voltage
overload trip condition. Alarms can be
conditions can cause a malfunction Provides the average of the three
implemented in the process monitor- 33
and damage to electrical equipment. phase rms line currents in amperes,
ing system warning of an impending
The S611 has low voltage protection accurate to within 2%. Current data
trip before a trip occurs, halting the
that will trip if the average rms can be used to indicate a need for
voltage falls below a preset value. maintenance. Increased currents in a
process. Costly system downtime can 34
be avoided.
The low voltage protection can be fixed load application can indicate a
programmed as a percent of nominal reduction in system efficiencies and Pole Temperature
voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip performance, signifying system Increases in pole temperature are
35
delay of 0.1–60 seconds. maintenance is due. caused by increases in ambient
High Voltage Average Pole Current temperature, start/stop times and 36
start duty cycles. Changes in pole
High voltage conditions can result Provides the average of the three-phase
temperatures represent a change
from disturbances in the electrical rms pole currents in amperes, accurate
in system operating conditions. 37
power distribution system. High to within 2%. The pole current is the
Identifying unexpected operating
voltage conditions can cause current through the soft starter. The line
conditions or changes can prompt
malfunctions or failures of electrical and pole current will be identical in
equipment. The S611 has high voltage in-line applications, and will differ in
maintenance and aid in process
evaluation activities.
38
protection that will trip if the average inside-the-delta applications.
rms voltage is greater than a preset Power Monitoring
value. The high voltage protection Average Line Current as a % FLA
S611 does monitor the power and it
39
can be programmed as a percent of Provides the average rms line current as
can be displayed on the UI.
nominal voltage from 101% to 120% a percentage of the S611 FLA setting.
with a trip delay of 0.1–60 seconds. 40
Three-Phase Line Currents
Provides three rms phase line currents
in amperes, accurate to within 2%. 41
Imbalances or changes in the relative
phase current to one another can
indicate anomalies in the motor or 42
the electrical distribution system.
43

Sheet 30 086
Diagnostics Current Limit Start Kick Start

22 Limits the maximum current available Selectable feature in both Voltage
Fault Queue to the motor during the start phase. Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
Current fault and a fault queue This mode of soft starting is used modes. Provides a current and torque
23 containing the last nine system when it becomes necessary to limit the “kick” for 0–2.0 seconds. This
faults can be read through the UI maximum starting current due to long provides greater initial current to
or the communications network. Fault start times or to protect the motor. develop additional torque to break-
24 identification can minimize trouble- This start mode allows you to set away a high friction load.
shooting time and cost, and prevent the maximum starting current as
■ 0–85% of locked rotor torque
arc flash incidents. The fault queue a percentage of locked rotor current
25 can be remotely accessed through and the duration of the current limit. ■ 0–2.0 seconds duration
a communications network to assist Bypass contactors close after current
Soft Stop
in planning maintenance resources. limit time.
26 30 different faults can be identified by Allows for a controlled stopping of a
■ Maximum current of 0–85% locked load. Used when a stop-time that is
the S611.
rotor current greater than the coast-to-stop time is
27 Control Status ■ Adjustable ramp time 0.5– desired. Often used with high friction
The S611 provides data that represents 180 seconds (can be extended loads where a sudden stop may cause
system conditions that can be read with factory modification) system or load damage.
28 through the UI or the communications
■ Stop time = 0–60 seconds
network. This data identifies the
status of the system and the control
29 commands the system is requesting
of the S611. This can be used for
advanced troubleshooting and
30 system integration activities.
31 Operation
Starting and Stopping Modes
32 The S611 has a variety of starting and
stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
33 applications. The motor can be started
in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and
Soft Stop are available within both Figure 30.5-9. Ramp Start
34 starting modes.
Voltage Ramp Start
35 Provides a voltage ramp to the motor
resulting in a constant torque increase.
36 The most commonly used form of soft
start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
37 duration of the ramp to full voltage
conditions. Bypass contactors close
after ramp time.
38 ■ Adjustable initial torque 0–85% of
locked rotor torque
■ Adjustable ramp time 0.5–
39 180 seconds (can be extended Figure 30.5-10. Current Limit Start
with factory modification)
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 087
Edge and Level Sensing Control

Edge or level sensing is selected
22
with the Start Control parameter in
the Advanced Configuration Menu. 23
Factory default is level sensing.
Edge Sensing
Edge sensing requires 120 Vac power
24
be momentarily applied to the Start
terminal (with the Permissive terminal 25
120 Vac) to initiate a start under all
Figure 30.5-11. Kick Start Graphic conditions. After a stop or fault occurs,
the 120 Vac must be removed, then 26
reapplied to pin 1 before another start
can occur. This control configuration
should be used when restarting of 27
the motor after a fault or stop must
be supervised manually or as a part
of a control scheme. The cycling of 28
120 Vac power to the Permissive
terminal before starting is required
regardless of the position of the auto 29
reset parameter.
Level Sensing
Level sensing will enable a motor to
30
restart after a fault is cleared without
Figure 30.5-12. Stop Ramp Graphic cycling 120 Vac to the Permissive
terminal as long as:
31
■ Permissive terminal is supplied
with 120 Vac 32
■ The auto reset parameter is set
to enabled
33
■ All faults have cleared or have
been reset
This control configuration should be 34
used where it is desirable to restart a
motor after a fault without additional
manual or automatic control. An
35
example of this condition would be
on a remote pumping station where it
is desirable to automatically restart a
36
pump after a power outage without
operator intervention.
37
If the auto reset feature is used,
CAUTION must be exercised to
ensure that any restart occurs in 38
a safe manner.
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 088
Product Selection
22 Motor applications and customer on what the soft starter is capable of. arises, consult a local Eaton
needs come in many different If the application falls under these Representative or call the Eaton
23 varieties. The standard and severe-
duty rating tables provide guidelines
categories, use these charts. For other
applications, or when a question
Technical Resource Center.
Table 30.5-20. S611 Horsepower Ratings—300% FLA at 15 Seconds at 50°C

24 Maximum 60 Hz Catalog
Current 200 V 230 V 460 V 575–600 V Number
Amperes
25 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV
52 15 10 15 15 40 30 50 40 S611A052N3S
65 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S611A065N3S
26 77 20 20 25 20 60 50 75 60 S611A077N3S
99 30 25 30 30 75 60 100 75 S611B099N3S
125 40 30 40 40 100 75 125 100 S611B125N3S
27 156 50 40 60 50 125 100 150 125 S611C156N3S
180 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S611C180N3S
242 75 60 75 75 200 150 250 200 S611D242N3S
28 302 100 75 100 100 250 200 350 250 S611E302N3S
361 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S611E361N3S
414 150 125 N/A 150 350 250 450 350 S611F414N3S
29
Options
30 Pump Control
For pump control option, change the 9th digit in the Catalog Number to P.
31 Table 30.5-21. S611 Horsepower Ratings—Pump Control Option
Maximum 60 Hz Catalog
Current 200 V 230 460 V 575–600 V Number
32 Amperes
1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV
52 15 10 15 15 40 30 50 40 S611A052P3S
33 65 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S611A065P3S
77 20 20 25 20 60 50 75 60 S611A077P3S
99 30 25 30 30 75 60 100 75 S611B099P3S
34 125
156
40
50
30
40
40
60
40
50
100
125
75
100
125
150
100
125
S611B125P3S
S611C156P3S
180 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S611C180P3S
35 242
302
75
100
60
75
75
100
75
100
200
250
150
200
250
350
200
250
S611D242P3S
S611E302P3S
361 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S611E361P3S
414 150 125 N/A 150 350 250 450 350 S611F414P3S
36
37 ■ IEC 60947-4-2
■ UL listed
■ CSA certified (3211 06)
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 089

Table 30.5-22. Specifications—S611 Solid-State Soft Starter
22
Soft Starter S611A052 S611A065 S611A072 S611B099 S611B125 S611C156 S611C180 S611D242 S611E302 S611E361 S611F414
(Partial Catalog Number) 23
Maximum 52 65 77 99 125 156 180 242 302 361 414
current capacity
FLA range 26–52 32.5–65 38.5–77 48–99 62.5–125 78–156 90–180 120–242 151–302 180.5–361 207–414 24
Dimensions—Inches (mm)
Width 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 17.56 (446.0) 17.56 (446.0) 25
Height 19.45 (494.0) 19.45 (494.0) 20.83 (529.1) 20.83 (529.1) 31.15 (791.2) 31.15 (791.2)
Depth 7.46 (189.5) 7.46 (189.5) 8.37 (212.6) 8.37 (212.6) 9.54 (242.3) 9.54 (242.3)
Weight in lb (kg) 24 (11) 24 (11) 33 (15) 38 (15) 86 (39) 102 (46) 26
General Information
Bypass mechanical
lifespan
10 million 27
Insulating voltage 660 V
Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds 28
Resistance to vibration 1g
Resistance to shock Meets ITSA standards
Electrical Information 29
Operating voltage 130–600 V
Operating frequency 47–63 Hz 30
Overload setting (frame) 50–100% FLA
Trip class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947) 31
Number of conductors One One One One One One One One Two Two Two
Wire sizes 14–2/0 14–2/0 14–2/0 14–2/0 2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
2–600
kcmil
32
Type of connectors Lug
Control Wiring 33
Wire sizes in AWG 22–12
Number of conductors Two (or one 12–14 AWG)
Torque requirements 3.5 lb-in
34
Maximum size 12 AWG
Control Power Requirements 35
Voltage range 108–132
(24 V ±10%)
Steady-state 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.75 0.75 0.75 — 36
current amperes
Inrush current amperes 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 —
Ripple 1% 37
38
Amperes—maximum 3
Environment 39
Temperature—operating –20 °C to +50 °C
Temperature—storage –40 °C to +85 °C
Altitude <2000 m, derate 0.5% per 100 m >2000 m
40
Humidity <95% noncondensing
Operating position Vertical, line side up 41
Pollution degree 3
IEC 947-1
Impulse withstand 6000V 42
voltage IEC 947-4-1
43

Sheet 30 090
DS6 Soft Start Controllers
22 DS6 Soft Start Controllers Operation

Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage Bypass
23 ramp to the motor, resulting in a 100%
constant torque increase. This most
Speed
commonly used form of soft start
24 mode allows you to set the initial
voltage value and the duration of the Start Run
ramp to full voltage conditions.
25 Time (Seconds)
Bypass contactor(s) close after ramp
time has elapsed. Figure 30.5-13. Start Ramp
26 DS6 Soft Start Controllers
■ Adjustable initial voltage 30–92%
General Description of full voltage
27 Eaton’s DS6 line of reduced voltage
■ Adjustable ramp time 1–30 seconds
solid-state soft start controllers is very Soft Stop

compact, multi-functional, easy to install
28 and easy to commission. Designed to
Allows for a controlled stopping of
load. Used when a stop-time that is
control the acceleration and deceleration greater than the coast-to-stop time is 1
100%
of three-phase motors, the device is
29 desired. Often used with high friction 2
Speed
available for current ranges from loads where a sudden stop may cause
40 to 180 A. system or product damage. Setting the 3
30 Application Description
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off
Run Soft Stop
this feature.
With its small size, it can easily fit in Time (Seconds)
■ Soft stop time = 0–30 seconds
31 place of existing soft starters, wye-delta 1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)
starters, or across-the-line NEMA 2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
and IEC starters. This feature allows 3 = Soft Stop Time
32 easy upgrades to existing systems.
The product is designed to be wired Figure 30.5-14. Stop Ramp
in the three-phase line feeding the
33 three motor input leads as is done
for normal across-the-line starting. The
starter uses silicon controlled
34 rectifiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage
to the motor, providing smooth
acceleration and deceleration of the
35 load. After the motor is started, the
internal run bypass contactor closes,
resulting in the motor running directly
36 across-the-line. Internal run bypass
significantly reduces the heat generated
as compared to non-bypass starters.
37 The soft stop option allows for a ramp
stop time that may be longer than
the coast-to-stop time. An external
38 over-load protection is needed.
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 091
Features and Benefits Protective Features Standards and Certifications

■ Run Bypass mode greatly reduces ■ There are two auxiliary relays— ■ IEC 60947-4-2
22
internal heating created by the ❑ First relay is a TOR relay that ■ EN 60947-4-2
power dissipation across the SCRs. closes when the TOR is achieved
The bypass contactor directly (internal bypass relays close)
■ UL listed (E251034) 23
■ CSA certified
connects the motor to the line ❑ The second relay is a RUN relay
■ CE marked
and improves system efficiency that closes when the RUN signal 24
by reducing internal power losses is initiated and opens when RUN ■ C-Tick
■ Less heat minimizes enclosure size signal is removed. It remains
and cooling requirements, and closed during stop ramp time, Additional Information 25
maximizes the life of all devices if set to a value greater than 0. ■ Instruction Leaflet IL03901001E
in the enclosure The RUN relay will also open
■ LED displays device status and if a fault occurs 26
provides fault indication ■ Mains connection—The mains
■ Variable ramp times and voltage connection is monitored for an
control (torque control) settings open condition and/or undervoltage
27
provide unlimited starting configu- ■ Motor connection—The motor
rations, allowing for maximum
application flexibility
connection is monitored for an 28
open condition
■ Soft stop control suits applications ■ SCR faults—SCR performance is
where an abrupt stop of the load monitored during the ramp cycle 29
is not acceptable. Soft acceleration for proper operation
and deceleration reduces wear on
■ Heat sink over/under temperature—
belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts
and bearings High ambient temperatures, 30
extended ramp times and high duty
■ Minimizes the peak inrush current’s cycle conditions may cause the DS6
stress on the power system to exceed its thermal rating. When 31
■ Manages peak starting torque to temperature goes under –5 °C,
diminish mechanical system wear unit will trip as well. The DS6 is
and damage equipped with sensors that monitor 32
■ 24 Vdc control module enhances the temperature of the device. The
personnel and equipment safety soft starter will trip in over/under
temperature conditions, preventing 33
device failure
■ Bypass relay—The DS6 can detect if
the bypass relay fails to close after
34
the ramp start or opens while the
motor is running. The DS6 will 35
trip on a bypass dropout fault if
either of these conditions occur.
The device does not start when 36
bypass relay is closed and start
signal is applied
■ 24 Vdc low voltage—If the control 37
voltage falls below 20 Vdc at any
time during operation, the unit
will fault 38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 092
Product Selection
22
DS6 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.
23
Table 30.5-23. DS6 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C
24 Rated Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended Catalog
Current 200 V 230 V 460 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload C440 Overload Number
Amperes Breaker Size 1 Fuse Size 1
25 40 10 10 30 HFD3150L 150 A Class RK5 XTOB040DC1 2 C440A1A045SAX DS6-34DSX041N0-N
52 15 20 40 HFD3200L 200 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 2 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX055N0-N
65 20 25 50 HJD3250 200 A Class RK5 XTOB065DC1 2 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX068N0-N
26 77 25 30 60 HKD3300 300 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX081N0-N
96 30 30 75 HKD3350 350 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX099N0-N
124 40 50 100 HKD3400 500 A Class RK5 XTOB125GC1S C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX134N0-N
27 156 50 60 125 HLD3450 500 A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 3 C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX161N0-N
180 60 75 150 HLD3500 500 A Class RK5 XTOB220LC1 3 C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX196N0-N
1 Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.
28 2 XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.
3 XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.
4 ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
29
Table 30.5-24. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C
Rated Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended Catalog
30 Current 200 V 230 V 460 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload C440 Overload Number
31 27
34
7.5
10
10
10
20
30
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
150 A Class RK5
200 A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB040DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
DS6-34DSX041NO-N
DS6-34DSX055NO-N
40 15 15 30 HJD3250 200 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 6 C440A1A045SAX DS6-34DSX068NO-N
52 15 20 40 HKD3300 300 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 6 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX081NO-N
32 65 20 25 50 HKD3350 350 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX099NO-N
80 30 30 75 HKD3350 500 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX134NO-N
96 30 40 75 HLD3450 500 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX161NO-N
33 124 40 50 100 HLD3500 500 A Class RK5 XTOB150GC1S C440A1A005SAX 7 DS6-34DSX196NO-N
6 XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.
34 7 ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 093
DS6 Soft Start kW Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection. 22
Table 30.5-25. DS6 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C 23
Rated Motor Power (kW) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended Catalog
Current 230 V 400 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload C440 Overload Number
Amperes Breaker Size 1 Fuse Size 1 24
41 11 22 HFD3150L 150 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 2 C440A1A045SAX DS6-34DSX041N0-N
55 15 30 HFD3200L 200 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 2 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX055N0-N
68 15 37 HJD3250 200 A Class RK5 XTOB070GC1 2 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX068N0-N 25
81 22 45 HKD3300 300 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX081N0-N
99 30 55 HKD3350 350 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX099N0-N
134 30 75 HKD3400 500 A Class RK5 XTOB150GC1S C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX134N0-N 26
160 45 90 HLD3450 500 A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 3 C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX161N0-N
196 55 110 HLD3500 500 A Class RK5 XTOB220LC1 3 C440A1A005SAX 4 DS6-34DSX196N0-N
1 Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1. 27
4 ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload. 28
Table 30.5-26. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C
Rated Motor Power (kW) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended Catalog 29
Current 230 V 400 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload C440 Overload Number
28.8 7.5 11 HFD3150L 150 A Class RK5 XTOB040DC1 C440A1A045SAX DS6-34DSX041NO-N

30
37.5 11 18.5 HFD3200L 200 A Class RK5 XTOB040DC1 C440A1A045SAX DS6-34DSX055NO-N
46 11 22 HJD3250 200 A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 6 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX068NO-N
56 15 30 HKD3300 300 A Class RK5 XTOB065DC1 6 C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX081NO-N
31
68 18.5 37 HKD3350 350 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX099NO-N
90 22 45 HKD3350 500 A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C440B1A100SAX DS6-34DSX134NO-N
106 30 55 HLD3450 500 A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 7 C440A1A005SAX 8 DS6-34DSX161NO-N 32
134 37 75 HLD3500 500 A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 7 C440A1A005SAX 8 DS6-34DSX196NO-N
33
8 ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
34
Considerations Power Supply Table 30.5-27. Power Supply Selection
1. Either XTOB, C306 or C440 series Eaton’s PSG and ELC power supplies Description Catalog
or equivalent overload protection are recommended as a compact and Number 35
devices may be selected. low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The 85–264 V input and 24 V output ELC-PS01
light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices 380–480 V input and 24 V output PSS25F
2. Contactor is optional for normal have a wide input voltage range, 100–240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60E
36
applications. It is recommended and robust screw terminals make 380–480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60F
for mains isolation. these power supplies easy to install
and use. These power supplies are 37
available in 1A and 2A models.
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 094

22 Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers
Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N
23 General
Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Certifications UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
24 Ambient temperature °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C
(operation) derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius
25 to 60 °C to 60 °C to 60 °C to 60 °C
Ambient temperature °C –25 °C to +5 5 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
(storage)
26 Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 100 0m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m
derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per 100 m to rated current per 100 m to rated current per 100 m to rated current per 100 m to
27 a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m
Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical
Protection degree — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
28 Protection against contact — Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger-
proof (from front face) proof (from front face) proof (from front face) proof (from front face)
Overvoltage category/ — II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
29 pollution degree
Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
30 Vibration resistance
according to EN 60721-3-2
— 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
Dimensions in inches (mm) — 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(W x H x D) (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
31 Weight in lb (kg) — 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8)
Main Circuit
32 Rated operation voltage V 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac
Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated impulse Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
33 withstand voltage 50 µs
Rated operation current Ie 40 52 65 77
34 Motor Power Ratings

200 V hp 10 15 20 25
230 V hp 10 20 25 30
35 460 V hp 30 40 50 60
230 V kW 11 15 15 22
400 V kW 22 30 37 45
36 Overload cycle according — 40 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 52 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 65 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 77 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10
to EN 60947-4-2
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 095
Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N 22
Wire Specifications
Power terminals (box terminals)
Single conductor AWG 12–2/0 12–2/0 12–2/0 12–2/0
23
Terminal torque lb-in 53–80 53–80 53–80 53–80
Control signals
Single conductor AWG 16 min. 16 min. 16 min. 16 min.
24
Terminal torque lb-in 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
25
50 µs
Control Commands 26
Supply voltage control board Us
Nominal voltage Vdc +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15%
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
mA 65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
27
Voltage to the control terminals
(rated control voltage)
DC driven — +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% 28
Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14
Relay Outputs 29
Number of relays — 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc
Maximum current A 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 30
Soft Start Functions
Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30 1–30
31
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30 0–30
Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 096

22 Description Unit DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N
General
23 Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Certifications/marking — UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
Ambient temperature °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C
24 (operation) derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius rated current per Celsius
to 60 °C to 60 °C to 60 °C to 60 °C
25 Ambient temperature
(storage)
°C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m
26 derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per 100 m to
derate linearly by 1% of
a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m a maximum of 2000 m
Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical
27 Protection degree — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection against contact — Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger- Back of hand and finger-
28 proof (from front face) proof (from front face) proof (from front face) proof (from front face)
Overvoltage category/ — II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
pollution degree
29 Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
Vibration resistance — 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
30 Dimensions in inches (mm) — 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01
(W x H x D) (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1) (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1) (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
Weight in lb (kg) — 4.00 (1.8) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7)
31 Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage V 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac
32 Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

withstand voltage 50 µs
33 Rated operation current Ie 96 124 156 180
Motor Power Ratings
200 V hp 30 40 50 60
34 230 V hp 30 50 60 75
460 V hp 75 100 125 150
35 230 V kW 30 30 45 55
400 V kW 55 75 90 110
Overload cycle according — 96A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 124A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 156A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 180A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10
36 to EN 60947-4-2
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 097

Description Unit DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N 22
Wire Specifications
Power terminals (box terminals)
Single conductor AWG 12–2/0 12 AWG–350 kcmil 12 AWG–350 kcmil 12 AWG–350 kcmil
23
Terminal torque lb-in 53–80 44–123 44–123 44–123
Control signals
Single conductor AWG 16 min. 16 min. 16 min. 16 min.
24
Terminal torque lb-in 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Power Section
25
withstand voltage 50 µs
Control Commands 26
Supply voltage control board Us
Nominal voltage Vdc +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15%
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
mA 65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
65
600 mA/50 ms
27
Voltage to the control terminals
(rated control voltage)
DC driven — +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% 28
Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14
Relay Outputs 29
Number of relays — 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc
Maximum current A 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 30
Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30 1–30
31
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30 0–30
Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 098
Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

22
1.18
23 (30.0) 1.18
0.88 (30.0) PE
(22.5)
24
25 6.34
(161.0)
26 6.89
(175.0)
5.08
(129.0)
27
28
0.88 1.38
PE (22.5)
3.66 (35.0)
29 (93.0)
5.47
(139.0)
30 Figure 30.5-15. 25–75 hp Models
31 1.38
(35.0) 1.38
0.59 (35.0)
32 (15.0) PE
33
7.87
(200.0)
34
6.22 8.47
(158.0) (215.0)
35
36
37 PE
0.59 2.07
(15.0) (52.5)
4.25 7.01
(108.0) (178.0)
38
Figure 30.5-16. 100–150 hp Models
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 099
DS7 Soft Start Controllers Operation

22
Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage Bypass
ramp to the motor, resulting in a 100% 23
constant torque increase. This most
Speed
commonly used form of soft start
mode allows you to set the initial 24
voltage value and the duration of the Start Run
ramp to full voltage conditions. Time (Seconds) 25
■ Adjustable initial voltage 30–92%
of full voltage (120/230 Vac control Figure 30.5-17. Start Ramp
voltage) 26
DS7 Soft Start Controllers ■ Adjustable initial voltage 30–100%
of full voltage (24 Vac/Vdc control 100% 1
General Description voltage) 27
Speed
2
■ Adjustable ramp time 1–30 seconds
Eaton’s DS7 line of reduced voltage
solid-state soft start controllers is very ■ Bypass relays close at the end the
Run Soft Stop
3
28
compact, multi-functional, easy to ramp time (TOR)
install and easy to commission. Time (Seconds)
Soft Stop
Designed to control the acceleration
Allows for a controlled stopping of
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed) 29
and deceleration of three-phase 2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
motors, the device is available for load. Used when a stop-time that is 3 = Soft Stop Time
current ranges from 4–32 A in four greater than the coast-to-stop time is
desired. Often used with high friction
30
frame sizes. Figure 30.5-18. Stop Ramp
loads where a sudden stop may cause
Application Description system or product damage. Setting the Auxiliary Contacts 31
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off Auxiliary contacts are provided to
With its small size, it can easily fit in this feature. indicate soft start controller status.
place of existing soft starters, wye-delta
starters, or across-the-line NEMA® and ■ Soft stop time = 0–30 seconds Frame Size 1 (4A to 12A)—One Relay
32
IEC starters. This feature allows easy The auxiliary relay indicates when the
upgrades to existing systems. The
product is designed to be wired in
soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR). 33
the three-phase line feeding the three Frame Size 2 (16A to 32A)—Two Relays
motor input leads as is done for
normal across-the-line starting. The
One auxiliary relay indicates when the 34
soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).
starter uses silicon controlled rectifiers
(SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the One auxiliary relay indicates that a RUN
motor, providing smooth acceleration command is present, including start
35
and deceleration of the load. After ramp, bypass and stop ramp times.
the motor is started, the internal run
bypass relay closes, resulting in the
36
motor running directly across-the-line.
Internal run bypass significantly reduces 37
the heat generated as compared to
non-bypass starters. The soft stop
option allows for a ramp stop time that 38
may be longer than the coast-to-stop
time. An external overload protection
relay is needed. 39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 100
Features and Benefits Protective Features Standards and Certifications

22 ■ Run bypass mode greatly reduces ■ Mains connection—The mains ■ IEC 60947-4-2
internal heating created by the connection is monitored for a phase
■ EN 60947-4-2
loss and/or undervoltage during
23 power dissipation across the SCRs.
The bypass relay directly connects ramp up ■ UL listed
■ Motor connection—The motor ■ CSA certified
the motor to the line and improves
connection is monitored for an open ■ CE marked
24 system efficiency by reducing
condition during the ramp
internal power losses ■ C-Tick
■ Less heat minimizes enclosure size ■ SCR faults—SCR performance is
25 and cooling requirements, and monitored during the ramp cycle Additional Information
maximizes the life of all devices for proper operation ■ Instruction Leaflet IL03901001E
in the enclosure ■ Heat sink over/under temperature—
26 ■ LED displays device status and High ambient temperatures, extended
provides fault indication ramp times and high duty cycle
■ Variable ramp times and voltage conditions may cause the DS7 to
27 control (torque control) settings exceed its thermal rating. When
provide unlimited starting configu- temperature goes under –5 °C, unit
rations, allowing for maximum will trip as well. The DS7 is equipped
28 application flexibility with sensors that monitor the
temperature of the device. The
■ Soft stop control suits applications
soft starter will trip in over/under
29 where an abrupt stop of the load
is not acceptable. Soft acceleration
temperature conditions, preventing
device failure
and deceleration reduces wear on
■ Warning is indicated for an over-
30 belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts
and bearings temperature condition for the
next start
■ Minimizes the peak inrush current’s
■ Bypass relay
31 stress on the power system. Peak
starting torque can be managed to ❑ The DS7 can detect if the bypass
diminish mechanical system wear relay fails to close after the ramp
32 and damage start or opens while the motor is
■ 24 Vac/Vdc control voltage enhances running
personnel and equipment safety. ❑ The DS7 will also detect a condi-
33 120/230 Vac control voltage is tion whereas the bypass relay is
also available closed when the RUN command
■ Auxiliary relays indicate status of is given
34 the soft start controllers ❑ The DS7 will trip on a bypass
❑ The TOR relay is active until dropout fault if either of these
conditions occur
35 motor stop command is received
and/or the soft start controller
detects a fault condition
36 ❑ RUN relay is active during
the start ramp, bypass and
stop ramp
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 101
Product Selection
22
DS7 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.
23
Table 30.5-29. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C 1
Rated Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended MMP 2 Connection Catalog
Current 200 V 230 V 480 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload XTOE Overload Kit to MMP Number 24
Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size (Direct Connect) 2 2
XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 4

3.7 0.75 0.75 2 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS
DS7-342SX004NO-N 5
25
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 3 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 4
DS7-342SX007NO-N 5
7.8 2 2 5 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 4
26
DS7-342SX009NO-N 5
XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 4
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS
DS7-342SX012NO-N 5
27
15.2 3 5 10 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 4
DS7-342SX016NO-N 5
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 4
28
DS7-342SX024NO-N 5
32 7.5 10 20 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 4
DS7-342SX032NO-N 5
29
1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.
2
3
Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.
Not to be used with 230 V.
30
4 24 Vac/Vdc device.
5 120/230 Vac device.
31
Table 30.5-30. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C 6
Rated
Current
Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended MMP 7 Connection Catalog 32
200 V 230 V 480 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload XTOE Overload Kit to MMP Number
Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size (Direct Connect) 7 7
3 0.5 0.5 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 9 33
DS7-342SX004NO-N j
4.8 1 1 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 8 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 9
DS7-342SX007NO-N j 34
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 9
DS7-342SX009NO-N j
9 2 2 5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 9 35
DS7-342SX012NO-N j
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 9
DS7-342SX016NO-N j 36
17.5 5 5 10 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 9
DS7-342SX024NO-N j
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 9 37
DS7-342SX032NO-N j
7 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V. 38
8 Not to be used with 230 V.
j 120/230 Vac device. 39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 102
DS7 Soft Start kW Ratings

22 Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.
Table 30.5-31. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—
23 10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C 1
Rated Motor Power (kW) Maximum Maximum Recommended Recommended MMP 2 Connection Catalog
Current 230 V 400 V Allowable Allowable XTOB Overload XTOE Overload 2 Kit to MMP Number
24 Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size (Direct Connect) 2
3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 4
DS7-342SX004NO-N 5
25 7 1.5 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 3 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 4
DS7-342SX007NO-N 5
9 2.2 4 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 4
26 DS7-342SX009NO-N 5
12 3 5.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 4
DS7-342SX012NO-N 5
27 16 4 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 4
DS7-342SX016NO-N 5
XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 4
28 24 5.5 11 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS
DS7-342SX024NO-N 5
32 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 4
DS7-342SX032NO-N 5
29 1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.
2 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.
3
30 4
Not to be used with 230 V.
24 Vac/Vdc device.
5 120/230 Vac device.
31 Table 30.5-32. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—
10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C 6
32 Rated
Current
Motor Power (kW) Maximum
Allowable
Maximum
Allowable
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
XTOE Overload 7
MMP 7 Connection
Kit to MMP
Catalog
Number
230 V 400 V
Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size (Direct Connect) 7
33 2.5 0.33 1 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 9
DS7-342SX004NO-N j
3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 8 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 9
34 DS7-342SX007NO-N j
7 1.5 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 9
DS7-342SX009NO-N j
35 9 2.2 4 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 9
DS7-342SX012NO-N j
12 3 5.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 9
36 DS7-342SX016NO-N j
16 4 7.5 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 9
DS7-342SX024NO-N j
37 24 5.5 11 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 9
DS7-342SX032NO-N j
38 7 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.
8 Not to be used with 230 V.
39 j 120/230 Vac device.
Considerations 24 Vdc Control Power AC Control Power

40 1. Either XTOB or XTOE or equivalent
overload protection devices may
Eaton’s ELC power supplies are
recommended as a compact and
24, 120 or 230 Vac may be used for
control power in accordance with the
be selected. In addition, manual low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The model requirements.
41 motor protectors—MMP series light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices Table 30.5-33. DC Power Supply Selection
can also be considered. have a wide input voltage range and
robust screw terminals make these Description Catalog
2. Isolation contactor is required for Number
42 mains isolation.
power supplies easy to install and use.
These power supplies are available in 85–264 V input and 24 V output ELC-PS01
1A and 2A models. 380–480 V input and 24 V output PSS25F
43

Sheet 30 103

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers
22
Rated Control Circuit
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-340SX012NO-N 23
Voltage 110/230 Vac DS7-342SX004NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N
General
Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2; IEC/EN 60947-4-2; IEC/EN 60947-4-2; IEC/EN 60947-4-2; 24
GB14048.6; UL508; GB14048.6; UL508; GB14048.6; UL508; GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE 25
marking marking marking marking
Certifications/marking — UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick
Ambient temperature °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate 26
(operation) linearly by 1% of rated linearly by 1% of rated linearly by 1% of rated linearly by 1% of rated
current per Celcius to 60 °C current per Celcius to 60 °C current per Celcius to 60 °C current per Celcius to 60 °C
Ambient temperature °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C 27
(storage)
Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m 0–1000 m, above 1000 m
derate linearly by 2.5% of
rated current per 100 m to a
28
maximum of 2000 m maximum of 2000 m maximum of 2000 m maximum of 2000 m
Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical 29
Protection class — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection class applies — With optional covers from With optional covers from With optional covers from With optional covers from
to the front and operator
control and display
the NZM range, protection the NZM range, protection the NZM range, protection the NZM range, protection 30
type IP40 from all sides can type IP40 from all sides can type IP40 from all sides can type IP40 from all sides can
elements. Protection type be achieved be achieved be achieved be achieved
from all sides is IP00.
Busbar tag shroud — Back of hand and finger-proof Back of hand and finger-proof Back of hand and finger-proof Back of hand and finger-proof
31
(from front face) (from front face) (from front face) (from front face)
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
— II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
32
Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
Vibration resistance
— 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2 33
Mean heat dissipation at W 0.2 0.35 0.35 0.6
rated duty cycle 34
Radio interference — B B B B
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95
in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 35
Weight kg 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
lb 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77
Main Circuit
36
Rated operational voltage V 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac
Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 37
Rated operation current Ie 4 7 9 12
AC 53
Motor Power Ratings 38
200 V hp 0.75 1.5 2 3
230 V hp 0.75 2 2 5
39
480 V hp 2 3 5 10
230 V kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3
400V kW 1.5 3 4 5.5 40
Overload cycle according — 4 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 7 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 9 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 12 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
to EN 60947-4-2
41
42
43

Sheet 30 104

22 Rated Control Circuit
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-340SX012NO-N
Voltage 110/230 Vac DS7-342SX004NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N
23 Wire Specifications
Power terminals
24 Single conductor—solid or stranded
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
18–10
11
18–10
11
18–10
11
18–10
11
Control signals
Single conductor—solid or stranded AWG 18–10 18–10 18–10 18–10
25 Terminal torque lb-in 11 11 11 11
Power Section
26 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
1.2/ 50 µs
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated insulation voltage — 500 500 500 500

27 Control Commands—Vac/Vdc
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vdc 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4
Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
28 Pickup voltage — +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27
Dropout voltage — +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0
29 Relay Outputs
Number of relays — 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250
30 Maximum current A 1A 1A 1A 1A
31 Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30 1–30
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30 0–30
32 Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–100% 30–100% 30–100% 30–100%

Control Commands—Vac
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vac 102–253 102–253 102–253 102–253
33 Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 4 4 4 4
Pickup voltage Vac 102–230 102–230 102–230 102–230
Dropout voltage Vac 0–28 0–28 0–28 0–28
34 Relay Outputs
Number of relays — 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)
35 Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250
Maximum current A 3A 3A 3A 3A
36 Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30 1–30
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30 0–30
37 Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 105

Rated Control Circuit 22
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-340SX032NO-N
Voltage 110/230 Vac DS7-342SX016NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
General
23
Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2; IEC/EN 60947-4-2; IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
24
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking
Certifications/marking — UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick
Ambient temperature °C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly 0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly 0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly
25
(operation) by 1% of rated current per Celcius by 1% of rated current per Celcius by 1% of rated current per Celcius
to 60 °C to 60 °C to 60 °C
Ambient temperature °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
26
(storage)
Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate 0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate 0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate
linearly by 2.5% of rated current linearly by 2.5% of rated current linearly by 2.5% of rated current 27
per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m
Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical
Protection class — IP20 IP20 IP20
28
Protection class applies to — With optional covers from the NZM With optional covers from the NZM With optional covers from the NZM
the front and operator
control and display ele-
range, protection type IP40 from all
sides can be achieved
29
ments. Protection type
from all sides is IP00.
Busbar tag shroud — Back of hand and finger-proof Back of hand and finger-proof Back of hand and finger-proof 30
(from front face) (from front face) (from front face)
Overvoltage category/ — II/2 II/2 II/2
pollution degree 31
Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
Vibration resistance — 2M2 2M2 2M2
according to EN 60721-3-2 32
Mean heat dissipation at W 0.8 1.1 1.5
rated duty cycle
Radio interference — B B B
33
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118
in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 34
Weight kg 0.4 0.4 0.4
lb 0.88 0.88 0.88
Main Circuit 35
Rated operational voltage V 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac
Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 36
Rated operation current Ie 16 24 32
AC 53
Motor Power Ratings 37
200 V hp 3 5 10
230 V hp 5 7.5 10
480 V hp 10 15 25
38
230 V kW 4 5.5 7.5
400 V kW 7.5 11 15 39
Overload cycle according — 16 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 24 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 32 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
to EN 60947-4-2
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 106

22 Rated Control Circuit
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-340SX032NO-N
Voltage 110/230 Vac DS7-342SX016NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
23 Wire Specifications
Power terminals
24 Single conductor—solid or stranded
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
18–6
11
18–6
11
18–6
11
Control Signals
Single conductor—solid or stranded AWG 18–10 18–10 18–10
25 Terminal torque lb-in 11 11 11
Power Section
26 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
1.2/ 50 µs
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated insulation voltage — 500 500 500

27 Control Commands—Vac/Vdc
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vdc 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4
Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6
28 Pickup voltage — +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27
Dropout voltage — +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0
29 Relay Outputs
Number of relays — 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250
30 Maximum current A 1A 1A 1A
31 Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30
32 Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–100% 30–100% 30–100%

Control Commands—Vac
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vac 102–253 102–253 102–253
33 Current consumption at 102–253 Vac mA 4 4 4
Pickup voltage Vac 102–230 102–230 102–230
Dropout voltage Vac 0–28 0–28 0–28
34 Relay Outputs
Number of relays — 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run)
35 Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250
Maximum current A 3A 3A 3A
36 Ramp times
Start ramp s 1–30 1–30 1–30
Stop ramp s 0–30 0–30 0–30
37 Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 107
Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

22
23
5.12
(130.0)
4.80
(122.0)
4.92
(125.0)
24
25
M4 3.74
(95.0) 26
1.38
1.78
(45.0)
(35.0)
27
Catalog Numbers
28
DS7-340SX004N0-N DS7-342SX004N0-N
DS7-340SX007N0-N DS7-342SX007N0-N
DS7-340SX009N0-N DS7-342SX009N0-N
29
DS7-340SX012N0-N DS7-342SX012N0-N
30
Figure 30.5-19. Frame Size 1
31
32
5.91 5.51
(150.0) (140.0) 33
34
M4
4.65
(118.0)
35
1.38
1.78
(45.0)
(35.0) 36
Catalog Numbers 37
DS7-340SX016N0-N DS7-342SX016N0-N
DS7-340SX024N0-N DS7-342SX024N0-N 38
DS7-340SX032N0-N DS7-342SX032N0-N
39
Figure 30.5-20. Frame Size 2
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 108
PSG Series DC Power Supplies
22 PSG Series Features, Benefits and Functions Product Selection

DC Power Supplies ■ Universal input voltages: 85–264 Vac Table 30.5-35. Power Supply—Single-Phaseþ
for single-phase units, 320–575 Vac Description Catalog
23 for three-phase units Number
■ Rugged aluminum housing stands
85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5 A output PSG60E
up to harsh environments 85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5 A output PSG120E
24 ■ Current surge (power boost) of 1.5 85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10 A output PSG240E
times nominal current for 1 second 85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20 A output PSG480E
allows branch protection and
25 powering of high pickup loads Table 30.5-36. Power Supply—Three-Phaseþ
■ Wide operating temperature range: Description Catalog
–20° C to +75 °C (derating above Number
26 50 °C)
320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5 A output PSG60F
■ Adjustable DC voltage output 320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5 A output PSG120F
27 ■ LED indicating light for DC OK 320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10 A output PSG240F
simplifies troubleshooting 320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20 A output PSG480F
■ Compact size, with common depth
28 and height across all models, allows
for common panel depths and
PSG Series family consistency
29 ■ MTBF up to 800,000 hours ensures
General Description uptime and reliability
■ Heavy-duty screw terminals with
30 Eaton’s PSG Series of power supplies
finger-safe protective cover allow
is designed to be a high-performance,
high-quality line of products covering use of ring-lug terminals
31 a majority of 24 Vdc control applica- ■ All-metal DIN rail mounting
tions. With global certifications, hardware
compact size and an impressive ■ Class 1, Division 2 hazardous
32 operating temperature range, the location rated
PSG Series fits a wide variety of
applications at a competitive price. Standards and Certifications
33 Eight models are offered, from 2.5 A ■ UL/cUL listed—UL 508 (industrial
up to 20 A with both single- and three- control equipment)
phase input voltage models available. ■
34 cURus—UL 60950-1
■ IEC
Application Description ■ EN
35 The PSG Series is a line of general- ■ German safety
purpose power supplies for use in a
■ CSA certified (contact Eaton for
wide variety of industrial control
36 applications. Applications include certification dates and status)
communication networks, sensors, ■ CE marked
PLCs and many other electrical ■ RoHS compliant
37 systems.
Each model is equipped with a rugged
38 metal housing, heavy-duty screw
terminals and a variety of protection
features, making the PSG one of the
39 most versatile industrial power supply
lines on the market.
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 109

Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies
22
Capacity PSG60E PSG120E PSG240E PSG480E PSG60F PSG120F PSG240F PSG480F
60W 120W 240W 480W 60W 120W 240W 480W 23
Input
Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 3 x 400–500 3 x 400–500 3 x 400–500 3 x 400–500
Vac Vac Vac Vac 24
Voltage range 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC (0 Hz at DC 25
input) input) input) input) input) input) input) input)
Nominal current 1 1.1 A 1.4 A 2.9 A 5.7 A 0.3 A 0.5 A 0.8 A 1.6 A
Inrush current 30 A <80 A N/A N/A <30 A <30 A <40 A <50 A 26
limitation 1
Mains buffering at >20 ms >35 ms >20 ms >20 ms >30 ms >35 ms >35 ms >20 ms
nominal load (typ.) 1 27
Turn-on time <2.5 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec <2 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec
Internal fuse T3.15 AH/250 V T3.15 AH/250 V T6.3AH/250 V F10H/250 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500V
28
External fusing 6 A, 10 A or 6 A, 10 A or 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 3 x circuit 3 x circuit 3 x circuit 3 x circuit
16 A 16 A breakers 6 A, breakers 6 A, breakers 6 A, breakers 6 A,
10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A
Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA
29
Output
Nominal output 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 30
voltage
Adjustment range 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc
Nominal current 2.5 A 5A 10 A 20 A 2.5 A 5A 10 A 20 A 31
Startup with Max. 8000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF
capacitive loads
Max. power 10 W 22.5 W 42.5 W 72 W 9W 18 W 36 W 72 W 32
dissipation idling nom-
inal load approx.
Efficiency (at 400 Vac >85% typ >84% typ >84% typ >86% typ >86% at 3 x >86% at 3 x >86% at 3 x >86% at 3 x 33
and nominal values) 400 Vac; 400 Vac; 400 Vac; 400 Vac;
>85% at 3 x >85% at 3 x >85% at 3 x >85% at 3 x
500 Vac 500 Vac 500 Vac 500 Vac 34
Current surge 3.75 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A 3.75 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A
(at 24 Vdc)
Current surge time/ 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 1 sec. (at 10- 35
cycle sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals) sec. intervals)
Residual ripple/peak <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/ <50 mV/
switching (20 MHz) <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <240 mVpp 36
Parallel operation With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring With O-ring
Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode Diode
Galvanic Isolation 37
Input/output 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type 4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC test)/3 kVAC
(routine test) (routine test) (routine test) (routine test) (routine test) (routine test) (routine test) (routine test) 38
Input/ground 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC test)/1.5 kVAC
Output/ground 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type 1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac test)/500 Vac
1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac.
2 85–264 Vac (DC input range 120–375 Vdc).
3 320–575 Vac (DC input range 450–800 Vdc). 41
42
43

Sheet 30 110
Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies (Continued)

22 Capacity PSG60E PSG120E PSG240E PSG480E PSG60F PSG120F PSG240F PSG480F
60W 120W 240W 480W 60W 120W 240W 480W
General/Physical Data
23 Housing material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
(Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052) (Al5052)
24 Signals Green LED for

DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
MTBF >800,000 hrs >800,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs
25 Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 32 mm 50 mm 85 mm 160 mm 70 mm 70 mm 85 mm 160 mm
Dimensions (H) 120 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 118.5 mm 120.5 mm 115 mm
26 Weight (kg) 0.37 0.54 1.04 1.8 0.56 0.72 0.77 1.71
Operating temperature –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to –20°C to
+75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C +75°C (>50°C
27 derating) derating) derating) derating) derating) derating) derating) derating)
Storage temperature –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to –25°C to
+85°C +85°C +85°C +85°C +85°C +85°C +85°C +85°C
28 Operating humidity <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non-
condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing
Vibration (operating) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
29 Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Climatic class 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according
to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721
30
Safety and Protection
Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor
31 Surge voltage protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
against internal surge
Safety class Class I Class I Class I Class I Class I Class I Class I Class I
32 with ground with ground with ground with ground with ground with ground with ground with ground
connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection
Shock 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
33 1 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s/s, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y, Z direction, in acc. with IEC 68-2-6.
2 30G (300 m/s/s) in all directions according to IEC 68-2-27.
34 Power Derating Curves
35 110 110 110

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
36 70 70 70
Load (%)
Load (%)
Load (%)
60 60 60
50 50 50
37 40
30
40
30
40
30
20 20 20
10 10 10
38 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
39 Figure 30.5-21. Vertical Mounting Position Figure 30.5-22. Vertical Mounting Position Figure 30.5-23. Vertical Mounting Position
PSG60E PSG60F, PSG120E, PSG120F, PSG480E, PSG240E, PSG240F
PSG480F
40
41
42
43

Sheet 30 111
Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
22
23
32.0 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5
105.2 ±0.5 24
Catalog Number:
PSG60E
24V 2.5A
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
25
Adjust
DC OK
26
121.0 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL
27
28
100-240V~1.5A
50-60Hz
5.0 ±0.2
29
Figure 30.5-24. PSG60E 30
111.4 ±0.5 31
96.5 ±0.5
32
33
121.0
±0.5 6.6
SPEC LABEL ±0.1
34
35
70.0 ±0.5
36
Figure 30.5-25. PSG60F
37
50.0 ±0.2
DC 24V 5A
38
Adjust 39
DC OK
121.0
±0.2
40
41
AC 100-240V 2A
50-60 Hz
13.0 4.0 42
5.5 115.0 ±0.6
Figure 30.5-26. PSG120E 43

Sheet 30 112
Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

22 Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
23
111.3 ±0.5
24 96.4 ±0.5
25
Adjust
26 DC OK
121.0
±0.5 6.6
±0.1
27 SPEC LABEL
28
29 70.0 ±0.5

30
118.5 ±0.5
31
105.2 ±0.5
32
33 24V 10A Adjust

CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
DC OK
Catalog Number:
121.0 ±0.5 PSG240E
34 SPEC LABEL
35 5.0 ±0.2
100-240V~5A
50-60Hz
36
85.0 ±0.5
37 Figure 30.5-28. PSG240E
38 120.5 ±0.5
105.2 ±0.5
39
40 CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
24V 10A Adjust
DC OK
Catalog Number:
41 121.0 ±0.5 PSG240F
SPEC LABEL
42
5.0 ±0.2
3-Phase 400-500V~0.8A 50-60Hz
43
85.0 ±0.5

Sheet 30 113
Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
22
23
160.0 ±0.5 7.1
24
25
Catalog Number:
121.0 ±0.5 PSG480E
6.6 ±0.1 26
N L Adjust
100-240V~ 7A 50-60Hz
DC OK
24V 20A
27
96.6 ±0.5
28
111.4 ±0.5
Figure 30.5-30. PSG480E 29
160.0 ±0.5
30
7.1
31
121.0 ±0.5
Catalog Number:
PSG480F
32
6.6 ±0.1
Adjust
33
DC OK
3-Phase 400-500V~1.4A 50-60Hz 24V 20A
96.6 ±0.5 34
111.4 ±0.5
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018
Sheet 30 114

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018 Enclosures
Sheet 30 115
General Information
General Information— Type 4 (Conforms to IP65)—for Indoor or

22
Outdoor Use
Technical Reference Provide measure of protection from
splashing water, hose-directed water
Enclosure Types and wind blown dust or rain. 23
Enclosures provide mechanical and Constructed of sheet steel with
electrical protection for operator and gasketed cover.
equipment. Brief descriptions of the
24
various types of Eaton’s enclosures Designed to meet tests for hose-down,
offered by Eaton are given below. See external icing and corrosion protec-
NEMA Standards Publication No. 250 tion. When conduit connections are 25
for more comprehensive descriptions, specified, enclosure has two watertight
definitions and/or test criteria. hubs (power) installed top and bottom
Type 1 or one control hub installed in 26
bottom—depending on size.
Type 1 (Conforms to IP40)—for Indoor Use
Suitable for most applications where
Cover-mounted pilot device holes are 27
provided and covered with hole plugs.
unusual service conditions do not
exist and where a measure of protec-
tion from accidental contact with 28
enclosed equipment is required.
Designed to meet tests for rod entry
and rust resistance. Enclosure is sheet 29
steel, treated to resist corrosion.
Depending on the size, knockouts are
provided on the top, bottom and 30
sometimes on the side.
31
32
33
Type 4X
Type 4X (Conforms to IP65)—for Indoor or 34

Outdoor Use
Provide measure of protection from
splashing water, hose-directed water,
35
Type 3R
wind blown dust, rain and corrosion.
Type 3R (Conforms to IP52)—for Constructed of stainless steel with
Outdoor Use gasketed cover. Designed to meet
36
Primarily intended for applications same tests as Type 4 except enclosure
must pass a 200-hour salt spray corro-
where falling rain, sleet or external ice
sion resistance test.
37
formations are present. Gasketed
cover. Designed to meet tests for rain, Provided as 304-grade stainless steel
rod entry, external icing and rust resis- as standard. Select 316-grade option 38
tance. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated for improved corrosion resistance.
to resist corrosion. Depending on the
size, a blank cover plate is attached to 39
the top (for a conduit hub) and knock-
outs are provided on the bottom.
Cover-mounted pilot device holes are
40
provided and covered with hole plugs.
41
42
43

Enclosures January 2018
Sheet 30 116
General Information
Many Eaton Type 12 enclosures are

22 suitable for use in Class II, Division 2,
Group G and Class III, Divisions 1 and
2 locations as defined in the National
23 Electrical Code.
Type 12—Safety Interlock
24 The Type 12 enclosure can be ordered
with a safety interlock on the door that
can be padlocked off. A vault-type door
25 latch system is used. A tapered plate
holds the gasketed door tight against
the case edge to provide a positive
26 seal. The special door interlock
consists of the door handle and a
screwdriver operated cover defeater.
27
The cover defeater and the disconnect
Type 7 & 9 Bolted interlock defeater are both recessed
28 Type 7/9—for Hazardous Gas Locations Type 12 screwdriver operated devices which
cannot be manipulated with other
For use in Class I, Group B, C or D; Type 12—(Conforms to IP62)— types of tools.
Class II, Groups E, F and Class III for Indoor Use
29 indoor locations as defined in the Provide a degree of protection from
National Electrical Code. Type 7/9 dripping liquids (non-corrosive),
enclosures must withstand the pres-
30 sure generated by explosion of
falling dirt and dust. Designed to meet
tests for drip, dust and rust resistance.
internally trapped gases and be able to Constructed of sheet steel. Hole plugs
contain the explosion so that gases in
31 the surrounding atmosphere are not
cover pilot device holes. There are no
knockouts, hub cover plates or hubs
ignited. Under normal operation, the installed.
surface temperature of the enclosure
32 must be below the point where it could Table 30.6-1. IEC IP Index of Protection Ratings
ignite explosive gases present in the 1st Description 2nd Description
surrounding atmosphere. Designed to Number Number
33 meet explosion, temperature and
hydrostatic design tests. 0 No protection 0 No protection
1 Protection against solid objects 1 Protection against vertically falling
34 greater than 50 mm drops of water
2 Protection against solid objects 2 Protection against dripping water
greater than 12 mm when tilted up to 15 degrees
35 3 Protection against solid objects 3 Protection against spraying water
greater than 2.5 mm
4 Protection against solid objects 4 Protection against splashing water
36 greater than 1 mm
5 Total protection against dust— 5 Protection against water jets
limited ingress (dust protected)
37 6 Total protection against dust 6 Protection against heavy seas
(dust-tight)
— — 7 Protection against the effects of
38 immersion
— — 8 Protection against submersion
39 Table 30.6-2. NEMA Standard to

IP Equivalence
Type IP
40
1 40
3R 52
41 4 65
4X 65
42 12 62
43

January 2018 Enclosures
Sheet 30 117
General Information
Table 30.6-3. Enclosure Selection and Reference Chart—Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Box Designation NEMA Enclosure Type Width Height Depth 22
1 1 5.62 (142.7) 9.51 (241.6) 4.81 (122.2)
2 1 7.73 (196.3) 12.60 (320.0) 5.84 (148.3) 23
3 1 12.65 (321.3) 13.85 (351.8) 6.40 (162.6)
4 1 11.66 (296.2) 25.99 (660.1) 8.03 (204.0)
5 12, 3R, 4X 9.84 (250.0) 13.31 (338.1) 6.70 (170.2)
24
6 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 6.70 (170.2)
6A 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 8.44 (214.4) 25
7 12, 3R, 4X 12.26 (311.4) 14.37 (365.0) 6.70 (170.2)
7A 12, 3R, 4X 16.26 (413.0) 14.37 (365.0) 10.90 (276.9)
8 12, 3R, 4X 14.25 (362.0) 12.10 (307.3) 8.47 (215.1) 26
9 1, 12, 3R 4X 25.50 (647.7) 29.10 (739.1) 8.41 (213.6)
10 1, 12, 3R 4X 20.00 (508.0) 47.85 (1215.4) 10.48 (266.2)
A 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)
27
A 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 6.66 (169.2)
A1 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 8.49 (215.6) 28
A1 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 8.49 (215.6)
B 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 6.66 (169.2)
B 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 6.66 (169.2) 29
B1 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 10.90 (276.9)
B1 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 10.90 (276.9)
C 1 20.50 (520.7) 30.50 (774.7) 8.44 (214.4)
30
C 12, 3R, 4X 20.50 (520.7) 32.36 (822.0) 8.44 (214.4)
D 1 29.50 (749.3) 35.00 (889.0) 8.75 (222.3) 31
D 12, 3R, 4X 29.50 (749.3) 38.10 (967.7) 8.75 (222.3)
E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 28.00 (711.2) 61.75 (1568.5) 10.68 (271.3)
F1E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 37.00 (940.0) 74.75 (1898.7) 19.25 (489.0) 32
F2E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 42.00 (1066.8) 92.90 (2360.0) 19.25 (489.0)
P1 1 8.50 (215.9) 32.98 (837.7) 6.66 (169.2)
33
P3 1 18.86 (479.0) 38.40 (975.4) 8.47 (215.1)
P5 1 21.00 (533.4) 48.40 (1229.4) 8.97 (227.8)
P7 1 28.80 (731.5) 60.58 (1538.7) 19.28 (489.7) 34
I 1, 12 8.62 (219.0) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)
J 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 16.50 (419.1) 17.23 (437.6)
K 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 19.50 (495.3) 7.23 (183.6)
35
L 1, 12, 3R 15.87 (403.1) 16.50 (419.1) 7.23 (183.6)
M 1, 12 15.87 (403.1) 24.50 (622.3) 7.23 (183.6) 36
Note: See Eaton’s Enclosed Control guide or Web site for further details on enclosures.
Table 30.6-4. Noncombination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Table 30.6-5. Combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Box Dimensions
37
Box Dimensions Ampere SSRV Comb. Comb. Ampere SSRV Comb. Comb.
Ampere SSRV
Rating
Non-
combination
Ampere SSRV
Rating
Non-
combination
Rating with with
Fuses HMCP
Rating with with
Fuses HMCP 38
Box No. 1 Box No. 1 Box Box Box Box
No. 3 No. 3 No. 3 No. 3
0.8–27 S752 6A 2 304 S801/S811 G1 39
37 S801/S811 7A 360 S801/S811 G1 0.8–27 S752 B1 4 A1 5 304 S801/S811 F1E E
50 S752 6A 2 420 S801/S811 10 37 S801/S811 B1 A1 5 360 S801/S811 F1E E
50 S752 C A1 5 420 S801/S811 F1E E
66 S801/S811 7A 500 S801/S811 10
66 S801/S811 C A1 500 S801/S811 F1E E
40
105 S801/S811 7A 650 S801/S811 10
135 S801/S811 B1 105 S801/S811 D B1 650 S801/S811 F1E F1E
720 S801/S811 10 135 S801/S811 D C
180 S801/S811 C 720 S801/S811 F1E F1E
240 S801/S811 G1
850 S801/S811 10 180 S801/S811 E E 850 S801/S811 F1E F1E 41
1000 S801/S811 10 240 S801/S811 F1E E 1000 S801/S811 F1E F1E
1 Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two
four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a
3 Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two
four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a
42
DNA module or MOV.
2 DNA module or MOV.
Same as footnote 1, but CPT is not included. Upsize to 7A enclosure to 4 Enclosure may be reduced to an A1, with all space for all items as in
include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
footnote 3, excluding relays and CPTs. 43
5 Same as footnote 3, but CPT is not included. Upsize to B1 enclosure to
include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Note: For enclosure box dimensions, refer to table above.

January 2018
Sheet 30 118

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2018 Group Control
Sheet 30 119
Group Control Multi-Pak
Group Control Multi-Pak ■ Saves space over individually In addition to the barrier compartments,
mounted control the enclosure contains two wiring 22
■ Can be wall or rack mounted troughs. The top section is a wireway
■ Has flexible panel space for fitted with three power terminal straps,
auxiliary control items. Barriers each having terminals for extension 23
can be removed to provide to adjoining enclosures and to all four
oversized compartments compartments. The incoming line and
extension terminals are suitable for 24
■ Eliminates square duct or cable either copper or aluminum conductors,
entrance box from No. 6 to 350 kcmil. At the bottom
■ Simplifies wiring of the enclosure is another wiring 25
■ Permits quick, easy additions trough for interconnecting wiring
and rearrangements and outgoing cables.
■ UL listed—E69852, Guide NITW 26
Hinging of the front doors provides
for easy access to each module.
Enclosure Features The doors are also gasketed with a 27
Multi-Pak Four Compartment Enclosure The Type 1 enclosures are partitioned fire-retardant material. Knockouts
Showing Variety of Possible Equipment into either four or six compartments, are provided on the doors for the
Module Combinations Available to hold combination starter modules, mounting of pushbuttons and 28
incoming or feeder circuit breakers, fus- indicating lights.
Application Description ible switches, or other auxiliary devices.
The enclosure and wireway cover plates
Eaton’s Multi-Pak Group Control is
The barriers can be removed to provide
come in ASA-70 light gray enamel. An
29
oversized spaces. Each enclosure holds
designed to save time, space, and identification card retainer is mounted
up to four Size 1 or 2 full-voltage, non-
expense in installing motor control on each compartment door. A dust- and
devices—whether for residential,
reversing combination starter modules;
weather-resistant enclosure to house
30
up to two Size 3 or 4 starter modules,
commercial, or industrial buildings. the Type 1 enclosure is also available.
or a combination of both size ranges.
The modular assembly allows versatile,
on-the-job arrangement of Sizes 1 The compartments have hinged doors,
31
through 4 combination starters with interlocked to prevent opening when the
ambient compensated relays, incoming breaker switch is in the ON position. The
or feeder circuit breakers or fusible dis- disconnect operating mechanism can be
32
connect switches, pushbuttons, control padlocked in the OFF position.
transformers, timers, relays, and fuses. 33
The enclosures and separate, pre-wired The Multi-Pak enclosure adapts easily
modules are field-stocked and can be to installation requirements. Multiple
ordered individually, permitting field tai- units can be arranged to suit the space
loring to suit the application. available—horizontally on a single line Typical Six Compartment Multi-Pak
34
or two-high. Knockouts are provided at After Assembly
Benefits the top, bottom and sides of the enclo-
sures for conduit connection. Conduit 35
■ Enclosures and pre-wired equip- can be installed and cables pulled as
ment modules are individually avail- dictated by the construction schedule.
able from stock. Each shipping Combination starter modules and 36
carton contains complete mounting incoming or feeder devices can be
and installation instructions installed days, months or years later.
■ Cuts installation time by 25 percent. 37
The pre-wired modules can be
installed easily, using only a
screwdriver, at the job site 38
39
40
41
42
43

Group Control January 2018
Sheet 30 120
Group Control Multi-Pak
22 Combination Starter Modules Load and control conduits may enter Dust and weather-resistant enclosures
at the top or bottom. Starter wiring for four or six module units are available.
Eaton’s starter modules consist of diagram and overload heater installa- These enclosures are 34.00 inches
a Class A200 magnetic line-starter, tion instructions are attached to each (863.6 mm) or 50.00 inches (1270.0 mm)
23 prewired with a motor circuit protector starter door. wide, 31.00 inches (787.4 mm) high,
or a fusible DS disconnect switch on a and 11.75 inches (298.5 mm) deep.
panel. Full-voltage non-reversing and
24 reversing, combination starters are
available. An external reset button is Outgoing Conduits May Be All Supply Feed Thru Nipples
at Top, All at Bottom or Mixed
mounted on the starter module door.
25 With its versatile, modular design, the
Multi-Pak starter permits a variety of
motor control groupings. One module
26 can contain many different arrange-
26
Incoming Line
ments of devices, such as combination at Top or Side
linestarter with control transformers, (Either End)
27 and/or relays, or two feeder circuit
H-Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each
breakers, or fusible switches.
Outgoing Conduits May Be All Supply Feed Thru Nipples One Compartment Used
28 The contactor design comprises a glass at Top, All at Bottom or Mixed to Feed Supply to Bottom
polyester case with silver-cadmium
oxide alloy contacts, straight-through
29 wiring, out-front terminals, molded
coils, stainless steel kickout springs, Incoming Line
U-type magnet, and a shock absorber at Top or Side
30 baseplate. (Either End)
52
The circuit breakers, equipped with
31 adjustable magnetic trip elements,
protect against short circuits. Standard
three-pole, inverse-time, and ambient
32 compensated thermal overload relays
protect against overload.
Fusible switches are equipped to
33 accept either 250 V or 600 V Class H, K,
1, 2 or 3 Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each
and R cartridges fuses, with capacities

as listed by Underwriters Laboratories Figure 30.7-1. Wiring Arrangements
34 for overcurrent protection.
ON-OFF operating mechanisms are 6.38 (8) Knockouts on
35 molded from an ABS fire-resistant 3.00
(162.1) 2-3/4 Centers (Top 8 Bottom) 3.00 Note: For Six
material. (76.2) (76.2) Compartment
3.38 Enclosure
(85.9) Add 16 Inches
36 Components of each module have 7.00 6.13
(177.8 ) (155.7)
to Width.
individual printed labels identifying 8.50 0.63
(215.9)
size, voltage, ampere rating and so on. (16.0)
(8) 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch Knockouts
37 The labels also contain a schematic
32.00
2.00
drawing reference number covering (812.8)
(50.8) 3.38
2.00 28.00
the wiring of the component contained (50.8) (711.2) (85.9)
38 in the module.
5.50
3.00
(76.2)
(139.7)
Technical Data
39 Dimensions and Wiring Arrangements 0.25
(6.4)
Four compartment enclosures are
40 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) wide, 26.00 20.00
(508.0)
inches (660.4 mm) high, and 7.00 inches 18.63
(473.1)
(177.8 mm) deep with provisions for
41 four-bolt wall mounting. Six compart- 22.00
(558.8)
ment enclosures are an additional
1.25
16.00 (406.4) inches wide. Enclosures (31.8)
42 may be grouped together by nippling 3.00
(76.2)
through knockouts provided.
(4) Mounting Holes for 5/16 Bolts 2.00 (8) 2, 2-1/2 Inch
43 (50.8) Knockouts
Figure 30.7-2. Type 1 Enclosures—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

TB03300002E Tab 30

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TB03300002E Tab 30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage 30.

Motor Starters and

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

MS Starters with Hand /Auto Technical Data

■ Catalog number: MST02RN1PH 43

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Manual single-phase starters shall be

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

22 XT Manual Motor Protectors Enclosures Standards and Certifications

37 XTPB-B — 5 7.5 15 20 ■ Accessories include:

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Catalog Number Selection

Designation Trip Class

Figure 30.1-14. Manual Motor Protector—XTPR…DC1

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Figure 30.1-19. Frame D (10–65 A) Rotary

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Non-Combination General Description Typical Specifications

Loads: Magnetically Latched Lighting 29

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

22 CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed) Filament Lamps—Incandescent, Table 30.2-2. Ratings—CN35 AC Lighting

Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary Mtg. Holes for

General Description Electrically-held lighting contactors

Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

For enclosure box dimensions,

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data

Table 30.2-9. DC Magnet Coil Data

■ UL Insulation Rating—Class 130 (B), Coil Data Notes

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Type C30CNM—Open Typical Specifications Technical Data and Specifications

Auxiliary Contacts Rating: 38

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Power 1 14–8 AWG 75 ºC Cu

1 8 AWG stranded only. The C30CN contactor accepts up to a

Lighting Contactors— Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

These kits are for converting electri-

Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM Components—Exploded View

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Technical Data and Specifications

240 V 30 A Eaton T-mag 1 Eaton Box 2 14 kA Eaton Box 5 14 kA Eaton Box 5A 14 kA

28 Table 30.2-25. Circuit Breakers—Oversized Enclosure

240 V 40 A Eaton T-mag 3 Eaton Box F 22 kA Eaton Box I 22 kA Eaton Box L 22 kA

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

22 C30CNM Mechanically Held View B

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

A202–Open (ECL04–Enclosed) Typical Specifications The contactor shall be operated

These contactors are designed to Continuous Amperes Number 25

Specifications Figure 30.2-8. Open Type

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Table 30.2-35. Ratings—Latched ELC15 Table 30.2-39. Factory Modifications

33 Table 30.2-38. ELC12—Fusible

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

NEMA Motor Starters Features Standards and Certifications